JP7061351B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions.

There is known a gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine having a function of selecting a probability set value that gives a special result is known. In this gaming machine, RAM information is initialized by selecting a probability set value.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-42871

An object of the present invention is to prevent inconveniences associated with setting a probability setting value.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
Control means for controlling the game and
A setting means that enables setting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, and
A display means capable of selectively displaying a display related to the probability set value and a display related to the performance of the gaming machine is provided.
The control means is
A storage means that can retain the stored information even after the power is turned off,
It is provided with a legitimacy determination means for determining the validity of the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on.
The storage means includes a game work area and a game stack area related to game control, and a non-game work area and a non-game stack area related to the performance of the game machine.
The game work area is targeted for the validity determination, and the game stack area, the non-game work area, and the non-game stack area are not included in the validity determination target.
If the result of the validity determination is not valid, the game shifts to a game stop state in which the probability setting value is set to a configurable state as a release condition.
During the timer interrupt, the processing related to the setting of the probability set value by the setting means is performed.
After the setting of the probability setting value is completed, the game work area and the game stack area are initialized except for the non-game work area and the non-game stack area in a state where timer interrupts are disabled.
It is characterized in that the timer interrupt is enabled after the initialization is completed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent inconveniences associated with the setting of the probability set value .

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the common process of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. (A) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 1, and (b) is a flowchart for explaining the variation start process in FIG. 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining another example of setting of the probability setting value. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in the 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the determination condition monitoring process in 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 3rd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the state of the switch corresponding to the probability setting value in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the schematic structure of the setting means and the game control device in the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation process in the 6th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 7th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value change process in 8th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the 9th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the probability setting value confirmation processing in the tenth modification. It is a figure explaining the notification mode in eleventh modification. It is a front view of the gaming machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a blower drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower drying apparatus. It is a rear view of the gaming machine of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a heating and drying apparatus and a modification. It is a figure explaining the modification of the heating / drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the special variable winning device (large winning opening). It is a front view of the gaming machine of the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a blast effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower effect drying apparatus. It is a figure explaining the modification of the blower effect drying apparatus. It is a rear view of the gaming machine of the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a duct and a modification. It is a front view of the game board of the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of a rocking member. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the special variation winning apparatus of the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of an opening / closing member and a winning opening forming member.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is rotatably assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations and effects are provided, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed as an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, a sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided in the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (storage plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 are provided. The outflowing upper plate ball outlet 22, the lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game ball paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation handle 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub-display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation handle 24, the hitting ball launching device moves the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example. In the area (display area) where the image on the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character that directs the special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
Further, on the left and right portions of the center case 40, a board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game, is provided by an operating movable effect member. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, in the lower left of the center case 40, a sub that displays the fourth symbol for executing the decorative special figure variation display game separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the starting memory number. An information display device 90 is provided.

The sub-information display device 90 is a first light emitting unit composed of a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the first special figure variation display game. A second sub composed of a sub-game display unit 91 and a single light emitting unit forming a sub-game display unit that displays a fourth symbol for executing a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by the two light emitting units, and the second special figure variation display game are executed by the two light emitting units. A second sub-display unit 94 indicating the number of second start-up memories, which is the right to do so, is provided.

In the first sub-game display unit 91 and the second sub-game display unit 92, the light emitting unit turns off, blinks, and lights a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in variable display and a display indicating the result. Can be displayed by. Further, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 turn off the two light emitting units, respectively, for the number of the first start storage (holding in FIG. 1) and the second starting memory (holding in special figure 2). It can be displayed by blinking and lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied by displaying the fourth symbol on the display device 41, and the display area is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operating range of the board effect device 44 so that the sub information display device 90 is not covered in the process of operating the board effect device 44. ..

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (a normal figure start gate, a start area, an inflow area) that gives a start condition of a normal map variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the prize in the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal drawing start gate 34. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area) that gives a starting condition for the second special figure variation display game is provided.
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It holds a closed closed state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easily opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. It can be changed to a state (a state that is advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normally variable winning device 37 may be able to win a prize even in the closed state, and may win a prize in the closed state rather than in the open state.
Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, there is a special variation that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A winning device (large winning opening) 38 is arranged.
The special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. The big winning opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and is provided in a special gaming state or a small hit game. During the state, by converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). It has become. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the game ball flowing into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the gaming areas 32 in which the gaming balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player can adjust the firing force and launch the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed) to aim for a prize in the start winning opening 36, and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called left-handed). By hitting right), it is possible to aim for a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 34, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming region, and is launched into the right gaming region. The resulting game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are reached. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map fluctuation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, 56 for notifying the start storage number of each variation display game composed of.
Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display, right-handed notification unit) 57, which notifies that the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed game state. The second game state display unit (second game state display, time reduction state notification unit) 58 that lights up when a state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is a high probability state. A third game status display unit (third game status display, probability status display unit) 59 that displays that the game has been set, and a round display unit 60 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed). Is provided.
The batch display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display device) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked and driven to change. It is configured to indicate that it is inside.
Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is not. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and after a predetermined time, displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game. Further, the normal figure hold display 56 displays the start storage number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 53, by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of LEDs. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, with a plurality of LEDs. It is displayed by turning off, blinking, and turning on. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.

The first game status display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off when the left-handed is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed (normal hit). When the game state is such that right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (when right-handed), the lamp is turned on.

The second game status display unit (time reduction status notification unit) 58 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and the lamp is turned off in the normal gaming state (when the fluctuation time reduction function is not activated) in which the time reduction state does not occur. When the time saving state has occurred (when the fluctuation time shortening function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned off. If the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state (probability change state) when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the special game state is not in progress, the lamp is turned off, and in the special game state, a lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed. Turn it on. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like to generate. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage. A power failure monitoring signal that has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. It also includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal or a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. That is, it is a backup storage means capable of holding the data stored in the game control device 100 even when the power is cut off. Then, when the power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point. The power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. When the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle after display and the result mode is displayed, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display regions is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a hit in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining (including the execution time of the fluctuation display game in reach and non-reach fluctuation display), hit random numbers for determining the hit of the clock fluctuation display game, etc. A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 is provided. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state. A variable pattern table is selected from a plurality of variable pattern tables based on the state), the operating state (time saving operating state) of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of start storages, and the like. To get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and the like. It is connected to the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the large winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the starting gate 34, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is negative such as 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided to which a logic signal is input and converted into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. .. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, the third input port 124 is changed to a set value that serves as a detection means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting a probability set value to which a probability value that is a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operation unit that forms the first operation unit of the operation units. The setting key operation unit is provided with a keyhole for inserting the setting key, and is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. .. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it goes off.

The set value change switch 151 detects the operation of the set value change button forming the second operation unit of the operation units. The set value change button is a push-type button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed, and turned off when the set value change button is not pressed.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game is assigned, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is a game. It is supposed to be used. Here, six settings 1 to 6 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability values assigned to each probability setting value are 1/320 for setting 1, 1/310 for setting 2, 1/300 for setting 3, 1/290 for setting 4, 1/280 for setting 5, and setting 6 for setting 6. It is said to be 1/270. This probability value is a probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability setting value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and then the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position. The probability setting value can be changed, and the probability setting value can be changed by pressing the setting value change button in this probability setting value change state. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Further, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is pressed. When it is turned to the second position, the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed. The probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

The probability set value display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a probability set value may be indicated depending on the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like. Further, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability set value information may be displayed by using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. In this case, the information of the probability setting value is displayed while the operation related to the probability setting value is being performed (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), and other than that, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed. Give priority to display.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like, and the probability value used by the game control device 100 for the lottery of the special figure variation display game. Is used as a setting means that allows the assigned probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by the operation of the operation unit. The function of the setting means may be provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100. That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100. In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 so that the game control device 100 changes the probability setting value, or the setting sub-board side may change the probability setting value. The probability setting value may be changed and determined based on the operation of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152, and the determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, in the input unit 120, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not the 200 can accept commands), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24). Signal based on), out ball detection switch signal (signal based on detection by the out switch that detects all game balls fired in the game area 32 and finished the game), and the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 A first input port 122 is provided.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, in the output unit 130, a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting the opening / closing data of the above is provided. Further, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the status display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting the display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open / close data signals of the large winning port solenoid 38b and the peripheral electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, generates a solenoid drive signal, and outputs the first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , The current of the batch display device 50 output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal board 71. , A fifth driver 138e is provided to receive the display data output from the second output port 134 and display it on the status display device 160.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A holdable FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) such as a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331. ). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit that drives and controls a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and a sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including a center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and a frame forming a movable effect device for producing a game including a special figure variation display game by an operating movable effect member. An effect device may be provided, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300. Is provided, and a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning opening is the payout control device 200 ( From the payout unit controlled by (see FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34 is provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball driven inside passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. If it is less than), the number of normal figure start storages is added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored in ROM 111B. The stored number of the normal map start prize is displayed on the normal map hold display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not being executed. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is judged. Then, the process of starting the normal map fluctuation display game is performed. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns over a predetermined fluctuation time on the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50 as a process for executing the normal map variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the ordered order, the process of displaying the normal map fluctuation display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the normal figure display 53 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. It may be configured.

If the result of the solenoid fluctuation display game is a hit, a lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol that has a special result mode is displayed on the solenoid display 53 according to the type of hit. Along with displaying the stop, the solenoid solenoid 37c is operated to control the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 to be opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display 53 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition to storing, the second start memory, which forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the big hit random value, the big hit symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted randomness The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. The number of stored start storages is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory. Displayed as a display. It is also displayed on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game becomes ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores in the earliest start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The hit / miss random value for jackpot determination is compared with the determined random value stored in the ROM 111B and set according to the probability set value, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 1 is performed, the process of displaying the first special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed. Further, when the second special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After the display during the change of the special figure 2 is performed, the process of displaying the second special figure change display game for stopping and displaying the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 (variation display device) corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game and has a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters). Displaying decorative special figures that change the display of symbols, etc.) Performs processing to display the game. Further, the sub-game display unit of the sub-information display device 90 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game that changes the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit in response to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area ( In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that makes it difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest.

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. In addition to displaying the lighting pattern, processing is performed to generate a special game state or a small hit game state. In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and the game is entered into the large winning opening. Controls to allow the inflow of balls. Then, until either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening, the large winning opening is satisfied. Is set as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. Further, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state, high probability state of normal figure, second operation state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. It has become. In this time-saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) should be a high probability (normal figure high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal variable winning device 37 is in the low probability state of the normal figure. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the probability of normal drawing is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state. That is, the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is configured to be controlled by either a first operating state or a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state. ..

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec x 1 time) of the first hit stop symbol, Opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the second hit stop symbol and opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), opening time (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times) of the third hit stop symbol 3 times), it is possible to set.

It should be noted that the execution time, the normal figure stop time, the normal electric opening number of times, and the normal electric opening time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are appropriately set so as to control the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game to be a second variable time shorter than the first variable time. (For example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). 704msec). Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than the first opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). Further, in the time-saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening (for example, twice) for the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal figure low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It can be a probability (a high probability state in the normal map, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display may be performed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices or different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a start memory of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is designed to be executed (priority is executed). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game is equipped with a coil for magnetic detection, and the game ball utilizes the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used to detect. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step S4. Next, the firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that is a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to the validity determination) that is not subject to the validity determination (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

The signal from the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 and the signal from the main body frame opening detection switch are input to the third input port 124, and the third input port 124 is set before the start of the standby time. By reading the state of the input port 124, the state of the setting value change switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 at the time of turning on the power and the open state of the front frame 12 (main body frame) can be grasped. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an open / close detecting means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 12. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 open and the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value can be changed in the probability setting value change state. Will be. Further, when the power is turned on while the setting value change button is pressed without turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position, the RAM 111C is cleared (initialized). ing. Since the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened, the opening of the front frame 12 is a condition.

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue to operate the set value change button from the power-on to the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it is not necessary to perform such a troublesome operation, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power is not accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks for the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is granted to the read / writeable RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16; Y), the power failure in the RWM. It is determined whether the value of the inspection area 2 is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the above match (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determining means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on. When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S21). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

In the case of the probability set value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power is cut off during the probability setting value change state and the RAM data is normally backed up. In this case, the probability setting is set again. The value is changed. Further, when the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, an area for a probability setting value, an area for an initial value random number, an area for a variation pattern random number, an area for game control, and an area for displaying a state are set in order from the beginning. In the area for the probability setting value, a probability setting value area for storing the information of the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. Will be done. This work area includes a work probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. Further, in the area for the initial value random number, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number, which are updated at any time, are stored. Further, the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 that are updated at any time are stored in the variable pattern random number area. Further, in the game control area, a work area and a stack area in which information (various data and programs) necessary for performing game control are stored are set. Further, in the work area for displaying the status, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying a base value, a bonus ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been launched into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the number of payouts based on the winning in the winning area. The information to be calculated and necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected by the outswitch and information on the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. In addition, the bonus ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning the prize opening from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending). It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening (excluding the inside) (so-called continuous character ratio), and the information necessary to display the character ratio. Includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by character).

The RAM clear start address 2 is the start address of the area for the initial value random number, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are performed. The area for game control will be cleared. The area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. Further, the RAM clear start address 1 described later is the start address of the area for the probability setting value, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are performed. The area for, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared. Further, the RAM clear start address 3 described later is the start address of the game control area, and the game control area is cleared by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set. Become.

The area for status display is initialized when the validity is judged in the status display edit output processing in the timer interrupt processing described later and it is abnormal, but the backed up information is not normal. In the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 set in the case is set, the area for displaying the status may also be initialized. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the entire area of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or a plurality of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, the area for the game control, and the area for displaying the state may be targeted. When targeting multiple areas, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be judged individually, or the checksums of each area may be added up to determine the validity. It may be judged collectively.

When the main body frame is in the open state (step S22; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S23). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and the RAM initialization process and the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed are performed. If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process proceeds to step S24 and the state of the third input port 124 read earlier. It is determined from (step S24) whether the set value change switch is in the ON state.

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S30, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure. When the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41 to initialize the initial value random number area, the variation pattern random number area, and the game control RAM area. Perform processing. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 has data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. It is an initialization means to initialize.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the power failure inspection area is not normal check data (step S16; N or step S17; N), and when it is determined that the checksums do not match (step S19; N), step S25. And the process of initializing all the RAM areas is performed. That is, the RAM area for the probability setting value and the RAM area for the status display are initialized only when a RAM error occurs. Further, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. Is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear start address 1 is set (step S25), and it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state (step S26). When the main body frame is in the open state (step S26; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S27). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35, and a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed are performed. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value and the initial value random number are used. Area, the area for fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial value is saved. The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), a command (specific information) for instructing the setting change is issued to the effect control board (effect control device). It is transmitted to 300) (step S28), RAM access is prohibited (step S29), control is stopped, and the power of the gaming machine is shut off. The effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and operates the board effect device 44, based on receiving the command for changing the setting. , By outputting voice from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc., a notification prompting the change of the probability set value is performed. This notification continues until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this case, if the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the front frame 12 is opened, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position, and then the power is turned on again, the setting key is processed in step S27. It is determined that the switch is in the ON state (step S27; Y), and the process proceeds to step S35 to perform a process of initializing the RAM and a process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. When the control is stopped in step S29, the front frame 12 is not opened after the power of the gaming machine is turned off, or the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not turned to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and the probability setting value cannot be changed to the changed state, so that the processes of steps S28 and S29 are performed again.

Although the notification is performed by transmitting the setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform the notification. For example, the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 may be used for notification, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be used to perform a display that is not used as identification information. Alternatively, a display device for notifying the abnormality may be provided.

As a process when the power is normally restored from the power failure, in step S30 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The area to be initialized here is a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is considered to be indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined. After that, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if the special figure is not in the high probability (step S31; N), steps S32 and S33 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. Further, when the special figure is in high probability (step S31; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is provided. On (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. Proceed to. In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the screen designation. Send multiple commands such as commands (for example, a customer waiting demo command when waiting for customers, and a recovery screen command in other cases). In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

The screen specification command sends a command according to the state of the restarted game. When resuming the special figure fluctuation display game that was interrupted due to the power cutoff due to the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that provides recovery information is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, in this case, information regarding the result of the special figure variation display game to be restarted is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when resuming the special game state interrupted by power interruption due to the resumption of control, a special game state resumption command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

Further, in step S35 of FIG. 6, the RAM area to be cleared should be cleared to 0 (step S35) and initialized as the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area (step S36). Here, when the backed up information is normal and the game is migrated from step S21 or S23, the RAM clear start address 2 is set, so that the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variable pattern random number, and the game control are used. The RAM area (work area and stack area) of is cleared to 0 and the initial value is saved. That is, the area for the probability setting value and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number.

On the other hand, when the backed up information is abnormal and the process is migrated from step S27, the RAM clear start address 1 is set, so that the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, and the area for the variable pattern random number are set. And the area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared and the initial value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the setting key operation unit). The area for displaying the status may also be initialized here.

Further, the area to be initialized is an area in which a value other than 0 is desired to be set among the areas cleared to 0, for example, a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the effect mode. When all the RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 in the area for the probability setting value. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability, it is possible to minimize the damage to the amusement store even if the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent activity. If a value other than 0 is set as the initial value, a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) can be set when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, the probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability set value is changed. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). This makes it possible to display the information of the probability set value currently set in the probability set value display device 153.

Then, the value in the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the work probability setting value area (step S39), and the command during the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S40). , Step S45. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by the operation, the output of voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. Although the RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 here. In addition, settings for outputting a security signal are also made. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output for a predetermined time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period in which the probability set value is changed. Further, since the RAM has not been initialized yet, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be made.

Further, as the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, in step S41 of FIG. 6, the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the game is initialized. The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the power area (step S43). As a result, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the RAM area for the game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit (here, the set value change button).

Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S44), and the process proceeds to step S45. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S44, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the RAM initial stage. Multiple commands such as a conversion command (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

In step S45, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S45, a process for starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). RWM is specified as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal map (win symbol random number)). After saving in the area (step S47), the interrupt is permitted (step S48). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S49) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the big hit symbol initial value random number, the small hit symbol initial value random number, the hit initial value random number, and the hit symbol initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol of the game. Further, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the hit stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuously incrementing the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main process. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. Also, depending on the model, there are some gaming machines that do not have a random number with the initial value of the winning symbol.

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, and hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is a unit. In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change method" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. "Is adopted. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S50), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S51). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S49) (step S48), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S49, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, which causes the main process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S52; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S53) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S57) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S59). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the start of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is provided. , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (setting value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization operation unit. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time. Will be.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main process, after the process of step S28 is performed, the process may be returned to the process of step S26, and the processes of steps S26 to S28 may be repeated until the setting key switch is turned on. .. That is, the control of the game may be stopped and the setting key switch may be turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124, not the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Further, if the state in which the processes of steps S26 to S28 are repeatedly performed continues for a certain period of time, the process may proceed to step S29 and wait for the power to be cut off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is that the main body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the on state. The open state of the frame 12 does not have to be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be a condition.

Further, it may be possible to shift to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is on without providing the setting key switch. That is, if the process of steps S22 and S23 is not performed and the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. In this case, the processing of steps S41 to S44 of FIG. 6 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control is not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for the game control by terminating without doing or setting the same probability setting value. By shifting to the probability set value change state only on the condition that the set value change switch is on, the configuration of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be diverted.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state that gives a game value to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). The control means includes a setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)), and the control means is a storage means (RAM111C) capable of holding the stored contents even in the power cutoff state. ), The validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and the operation unit for selecting the probability set value. A probability setting is provided when the storage means is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means, and the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. It means that the notification prompting the selection of the value is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state.

Further, the control means is configured so that the probability set value can be selected when the operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, and the information stored in the storage means is stored by the validity determination means. If it is determined that the value is not valid, the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is continued until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the control means stops the control of the game and waits for the selection of the probability set value when the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, the game control means includes a game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means. When the validity determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means has the specific information. It means that the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value is performed based on the reception of. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

Further, when the effect control means receives the specific information, the effect control means continues the notification prompting the selection of the probability set value until the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state due to the initialization.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the control means can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off. If the first operation unit and the second operation unit are not operated when the power is turned on, the storage means (RAM111C) is provided, and when the power is turned on, the first operation unit and the second operation unit are restored based on the information stored in the storage means. 1 When the operation unit is operated, the probability setting value can be changed by the setting means, and when only the second operation unit is operated when the power is turned on, the storage means is initially set. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit in the changeable state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an operation of selecting a probability set value and an operation of selecting initialization using the same operation unit, and it is possible to improve work efficiency in a game store. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

Further, the control means includes a legitimacy determining means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is legitimate when the power is turned on, and is stored in the storage means by the legitimacy determining means. When it is determined that the information is not valid and the first operation unit is not operated, the notification prompting the initialization of the storage means is performed. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

Further, the control means is configured to be in a changeable state in which the probability set value can be changed by the setting means and to initialize the storage means when the first operation unit is operated when the power is turned on. If it is determined by the validity determination means that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate and the first operation unit is not operated, the first operation unit is operated. This means that a notification is given to prompt the user to turn on the power. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. A plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change)) are assigned to the control means (game control device 100) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. Necessary for controlling the game by the setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the switch 151)) and the control means including the information of the probability set values selected by the setting means. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of storing information is provided, and the control means initially stores the storage means when the power of the game machine is turned on while a predetermined operation unit is operated among the plurality of operation units. It means that it was made to become. Therefore, the work of changing the probability set value and the work of clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S101). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as in step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches, signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for controlling the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. Generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready to launch.

Next, the random number update process 1 (step S105) for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process, the special figure. 1. Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 2 is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a of the normal figure, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 38a, and monitoring of errors ( Performs a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.).

Next, the probability setting value change process (step S108) for changing and confirming the probability set value is performed, and it is determined whether the probability set value is in the changed state (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S109; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S110). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as a process related to the progress of the game, a payout command transmission process (step S111) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, special The special figure game process (step S112) for performing the process related to the figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step S113) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S109; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above processing related to the game. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the payout command transmission process (step S111), the special figure game process (step S112), and the normal figure game process (step S113) should not be performed. However, it may be done for one or more of these. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed so that the prize balls are paid out. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, do not perform random number update process 1 (step S105) or random number update process 2 (step S106) in the probability setting value change state, and do not update random numbers in the probability setting value change state or probability setting value confirmation mode. You can do it. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and the panel radio error that checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. The monitoring process (step S116) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S117) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and a base value is obtained from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winning in the winning area. The status display edit output process is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupt) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, there is also a gaming machine that needs to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S141). Next, the data to be output to the output port 134 that outputs the data of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c is synthesized and output (step S142).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S143), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S144). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and the external information data are combined (step S145), and the combined data (for example, "door / frame opening" data, "security signal" data) is digitized / external information output port. Output to 136 (step S146).

After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S147), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S148). As a result, a plurality of light emitting display units provided in the batch display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S149), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, and "big hit signal" are combined. 4 ”data,“ symbol confirmation count signal ”data,“ start port signal ”data,“ main prize ball signal ”data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S150), and the combined data is combined. Output to the output port 137 for outputting external information / emission permission signal (step S151).

Next, the off-output data of the probability setting value display is set as the display content in the probability setting value display device 153 (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153). The probability setting value display permission flag is a flag set when the probability setting value display device 153 is permitted to display the probability setting value.

When this probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S153; Y), the probability setting value display data is loaded from the probability setting value display data area (step S154), and the display data is output as the probability setting value display. Output to port 134 (step S155). As a result, the probability set value display device 153 is displayed regarding the probability set value. On the other hand, when the probability set value display permission flag is not set (step S153; N), the display data is output to the output port 134 of the probability set value display (step S155). In this case, the off-output data set in step S152 is set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S156). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S157).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S158). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S159). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S160).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability set value is loaded (step S161). Here, the probability set value display data is loaded as the test signal output data from the probability set value display data area. That is, as for the information regarding the probability set value among the test signals to the test firing device, the display data of the probability set value display device 153 is used as it is. This simplifies the processing and makes it possible to output accurate information without changing the information of the probability set value. Of course, the data for display may be converted into value information and output.

Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S162), and if it is not in the ON state (step S162; N), the process proceeds to step S184. Further, in the case of the on state (step S162; Y), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (step S163), and the process proceeds to step S184. After that, the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 6 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device (step S164), and the output process is completed.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize ball, and the prize has not yet been sent. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information regarding the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas has a prize number counter area for each prize ball set for each prize opening (in the case of this embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning to the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 prizes can be stored in each of the 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. , The 3 prize ball counter area, the 10 prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to store up to 255 prizes, respectively.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When it is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value in the main prize ball signal output frequency region is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the remaining number of prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processes of steps S181 to S191 are processes for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processes of steps S192 to S201 are processes for transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state). Will be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, instead of transmitting the payout command for each timer interrupt, a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. It is configured to send a payout command when it is in a state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

The conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy state) are, for example, during the payout operation, ball lending operation, shoot ball out error, overflow error, frame radio wave fraud, and payout ball detection switch (payout). Counting the number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (number of unpaid prize balls = remaining number of acquired game balls) during an abnormality (switch for monitoring the balls), an error of insufficient payout, an error of overpayment ) Is present (when it is not 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, "0" is set in the prize number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count count.

Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the prize number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is checked whether the check of the count number of all the prize number counter areas is completed. Determination (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

Further, when it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 Acquire the payout number command corresponding to the address of (step S199). Then, the acquired payout number command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and for example, 200 msec is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If so, it serves as a prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

Since the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200 in this way, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and is backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be achieved without having the function to do so.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, which has a problem of increasing the cost. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball with different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the prize, and the payout control means (payout control device) that controls the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. 200), and the game control means issues a prize ball command based on a state signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. When a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means without transmitting to the payout control means. I am trying to do it.

Further, a plurality of winning areas (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, and the game control means (game control device 100) is provided. A prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of a game ball has not been transmitted is provided for each prize ball number, and a status signal can start payout control. When there is an untransmitted prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the state signal is sent by the payout control means. Whether or not the payout control can be started is specified before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command.

In addition, the game is controlled comprehensively, and a prize ball command is issued based on the winning of the game ball to a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38). The game is provided with a game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting the game and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. The control means issues a prize ball command when the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) to be transmitted to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area. The external information output means (game control device 100) is provided, and the external information output means can start the payout control by the state signal output from the payout control means. It means that the prize ball signal is output regardless of the presence or absence.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the status signal can start the payout control when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, special variation). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the prize device 38), and when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, the one prize ball command is issued by the payout control means (payout control device 200). ), The prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the game to the predetermined winning area. By updating when the ball wins and updating in response to transmission to the prize ball command to the payout control means, the number of prize ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored, and the external information output means can be used. It is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in connection with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and output the prize ball signal to the outside of the game machine every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The ball signal counter can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, updates the winning ball when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball by the external information output means. By updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been cumulatively processed yet.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 outputs 10 game balls. It is configured so that the main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the number of main prize ball number signal outputs by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main prize ball signal output for each schedule, the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually made, so that the schedule and the result can be matched. It is possible to deal with fraudulent payouts. In addition, even if a prize is won during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and even if the payout is made after the big hit is completed, the hall control (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judgment).

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 10 shows a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / state monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the changed state (step S299). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. When the probability setting value is not changed (step S299; N), it is determined whether the probability setting value confirmation mode is set (step S300). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed.

When the mode is not in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S300; N), the processes after step S301 are performed as the processes related to the progress of the game. On the other hand, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S299; Y) or the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S300; Y), the process proceeds to step S309. That is, in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed without processing related to winning.

In the case of the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, the special variable winning device 38 is monitored for fraud and winning, the normal variable winning device 37 is monitored for fraud and winning, and the winning slot is always available for winning. We have decided not to monitor the winnings, but you may do so for one or more of these. For example, fraudulent monitoring of the special variable winning device 38 and the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be performed. Further, a process other than the above-mentioned process may be included as a process that is not performed in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. For example, the processing after step S309 may not be performed. Further, the type of processing for not executing in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

In step S301, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the large winning opening is large even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S302) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the winning opening and detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraudulent monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, a fraudulent winning error notification command, and a fraudulent winning Information on the upper limit of the number (number of fraud occurrence judgments), the address of the winning slot switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. Further, in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, in addition to the number of times of monitoring repetition (number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the lower address of the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are displayed for each switch. Information on the lower address of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other large winning opening switch 38a in the large winning opening (special variable winning opening device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the large winning opening is not open even though the large winning opening is not open. The fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S304) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning in the mouth and detecting a normal winning is executed.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S305), and monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the Fuden even though the Fuden is not open. At the same time, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (step S306) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for a winning opening switch (for example, a winning opening switch 36a of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and a winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize is prepared (step S307), and the winning number counter is updated to update the number of winnings. The process (step S308) is performed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and the signals whose status should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 1, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. The state monitoring based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. To.

Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 2, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The status monitoring is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "1", the status monitoring based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. If the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave invalid signal is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. The state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of this embodiment, the value of the status scan counter is referred to the game machine status monitoring table 3, and when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. 2 Condition monitoring based on the signal is set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is completed. Since the processes of steps S315 to S317 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", they are executed once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
FIG. 11 shows a probability setting value change process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this probability setting value change process, first, it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S401), and if it is not the probability setting value change state (step S401; N), the probability setting value can be confirmed. The probability set value confirmation process is performed (step S422), and the probability set value change process is terminated.

Further, in the case of the probability setting value change state (step S401; Y), if the probability setting value extinguishing timer is not 0, the probability setting value extinguishing timer is updated by -1 (step S402), and it is determined whether the probability setting value extinguishing timer is 0. .. When the probability set value extinguishing timer is 0 (step S403; Y), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S404), and the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability set value information is displayed on the probability set value display device 153 by the output process (see FIG. 8) described above. If the probability set value extinguishing timer is not 0 (step S403; N), the process proceeds to step S405. In this case, the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, and nothing is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 by the output processing described above.

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability set value has been changed (step S405). The probability setting value changed is a state in which the probability setting value used in the game is newly set by performing the confirmation operation described later, and in this case, the probability setting value changed flag is set. If the probability set value has been changed (step S405; Y), the process proceeds to step S416. If the probability set value has not been changed (step S405; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406).

Then, in the determination of whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch (step S406), it is determined whether or not the input state from the set value change switch has changed to the on state. That is, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value change button is pressed. If there is no input from the set value change switch (step S406; N), the process proceeds to step S411.

Further, when there is an input from the setting value change switch (step S406; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5. The values of 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively, and the value of the work probability setting value area is updated by +1 each time the setting value change button is pressed. , The selected probability setting value will change sequentially. In addition, when the value of the working probability setting value area is updated by +1 in the state of 5, it returns to 0. Further, at this stage, only the value of the probability setting value area for work is changed, and the value of the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value used for the game does not change. The probability setting value selected based on the confirmation operation described later is saved in the probability setting value area. Further, although the number of probability setting values is set to 6 here, it is possible to set the number to any other value.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S408). As a result, the data displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 becomes the information of the newly selected probability setting value. Then, the initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability set value extinguishing timer area (step S409), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S410). As a result, as a specific display for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms) from the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is turned off and a blank display is performed in which nothing is displayed, and then new probability setting value information is displayed. Will be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated.

Here, a blank display in which nothing is displayed is set as a specific display, but other displays may be used. For example, when the probability setting value is displayed by a number from 1 to 6, a display other than this number may be used as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display that is not used as a display of the probability set value. Further, when the display of the probability setting value is displayed in a continuous lighting state, the display of the updated probability setting value may be blinked as a specific display. That is, the specific display may be a display mode different from the display mode after the specific display has elapsed. Examples of the display mode used as the specific display include a display mode in which blinking is performed, a display mode in which the blinking cycle is different from that in the non-specific display, and a display mode in which the display color is different from that in the non-specific display. ..

Further, information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the operation of the setting value change button, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the LED light emission of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device 44. The specific notification, which is the notification that the selected probability set value has been changed, may be performed by the operation of the above, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a, 19b, and the like. That is, the specific notification may be performed together with the specific display or instead of the specific display. Further, the display device 41, the special figure 1 display device 51, and the special figure 2 display device may be displayed in the same manner as the probability set value display device 153.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411). The touch switch is a sensor that can detect the contact of the human body with the operation handle 24, and outputs a signal when there is contact. When there is no input from this touch switch (step S411; N), the probability setting value change process ends. When there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S412). As a result, the selected probability setting value is set as the probability setting value used for the game. That is, touching the operation handle 24 is a confirmation operation for determining the selected probability setting value. Of course, an operation other than this operation may be a confirmation operation, and an operation unit for the confirmation operation may be provided in the setting means.

After that, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S413). Next, the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S414), the command for changing the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S415), and the probability setting value change process is completed. .. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. It notifies that the probability set value has been changed by the operation, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value has been changed (step S405; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is off (step S416). When the setting key switch is not off (step S416; N), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position, the probability setting value change process is terminated. When the setting key switch is off (step S416; Y), that is, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, the RAM clear start address 3 is set (step S417), and the clear target is set. The RAM area of is cleared to 0 (step S418), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S419).

As a result, the RAM area (work area and stack area) for game control is cleared to 0, and the initial value is saved. In addition, a timer for outputting a security signal is also set. That is, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the fluctuation pattern random number, and the area for displaying the state are not initialized. However, the area for the initial value random number and the area for the fluctuation pattern random number may be cleared. In addition, the area related to the change work, such as the probability setting value area for work that temporarily stores the information of the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state and various flags in the area for the probability setting value, is cleared. To. Therefore, since the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared, the display on the probability setting value display device 153 ends. In addition, since the flag for changing the probability setting value is cleared, the probability setting value change state ends.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S420), and the command for completing the probability setting change is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (the effect control device 300). Step S421), the process proceeds to step S48 of the main process shown in FIG. Based on receiving the command to change the probability set value, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and displays the panel effect device 44. It notifies that the change of the probability set value is completed by the operation, the output of the voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like. This notification also serves as a notification that the RAM has been initialized.

In the case of the present embodiment, in step S421, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the probability setting value information which is the information of the selected probability setting value, and the probability setting A plurality of commands such as a command for ending the change (a command for displaying a customer waiting demo screen and notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)) are transmitted. The command for ending the probability setting change may be a RAM initialization command. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, the effect according to the probability set value can be performed, and the effect of the game can be produced according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a probability setting value, such as making the selection probability different.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state in which the player is given a gaming value. Probability setting values to which probability values used for lottery are assigned are set to multiple types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from the above is provided, and the setting means includes a display unit (probability setting value display device 153) that displays information on the selected probability setting value, based on the operation of the operation unit. When the display of the display unit is updated with the selection operation of the probability set value, the specific display is performed for a certain period from the update. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display a display that is not used as a display of information on the probability set value as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

In addition, the setting means is configured to display the updated information for a certain period in a manner different from that after the lapse of the certain period as a specific display. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the display has been updated, and it is possible to clearly grasp the selected probability setting value.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
FIG. 12 shows the probability set value confirmation process (step S422) in the probability set value change process. In this probability setting value confirmation process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (step S431). In the probability set value confirmation mode, the probability set value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability set value can be confirmed. In the case of this probability setting value confirmation mode, it can be determined from the fact that the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is set.

When the mode is not the probability set value confirmation mode (step S431; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S432). As a result, a state in which nothing is displayed is set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153. After that, it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S433).

The term “during the game” means that the game is being executed, the special map variation display game is being executed, the normal map variation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal map variation display game is being executed, or the normal map is being hit. That is, it is a case where the state of the game is a prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the probability set value confirmation mode. If the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. In this case, information indicating that the mode cannot shift to the probability set value confirmation mode because the game is being played may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 to notify the effect.

The conditions for determining that the game is in progress (prohibited state) are not limited to those described above. One or more states selected from the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, the execution of the normal figure fluctuation display game, the special game state, and the hit state of the normal figure may be a condition, for example, the special figure. It may be said that the game is being played when it corresponds to either during the execution of the variable display game or during the special gaming state. Further, conditions other than the above may be added. For example, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, even if the out switch that detects all the game balls that have been fired in the game area 32 and finished the game detects the game balls, it is assumed that the game is being played for a predetermined period, and the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. good. Further, while the front frame 12 is closed, it may be considered that the game is in progress and the mode may not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode. Further, it is possible not to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode during the power saving mode that shifts after a certain period of time has passed without the game being performed. This power saving mode is released when the front frame 12 is opened, and the power saving mode can be regarded as the front frame 12 being closed.

Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state, that is, whether the operation unit is operated to set the predetermined state (step S434). If the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S434; N), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), the probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set (step S435), and the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S436). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started, and the information of the probability setting value currently set as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is displayed.

After that, the initial value is saved in the security signal control timer area (step S437), the command for confirming the probability set value is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S438), and the probability set value confirmation process is performed. finish. When the probability set value confirmation mode is started, a security signal is output as external information for a predetermined period. Further, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and produces a board effect based on receiving the command during the probability setting value confirmation. The operation of the device 44, the output of voice by the speakers 19a and 19b, and the like are used to notify that the probability set value is being confirmed.

On the other hand, when the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress (step S431; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439). When the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S439; Y), the probability setting value confirmation process ends. In this case, the probability set value confirmation mode continues.

When the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S439; N), the flag in the probability setting value confirmation mode is cleared (step S440), and the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (step S441). As a result, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends, and a state in which nothing is displayed as the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is set. Then, a command to end the probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S442), and the probability set value confirmation process is completed. The effect control device 300 ends the notification that the probability set value is being confirmed based on the command of the probability set value confirmation end.

That is, the probability setting value confirmation mode is started by turning the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position while the power is turned on, and ends by returning from the second position. When the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position, the probability setting value is changed.

As described above, by not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known while the game is in progress. , The fairness of the game can be ensured. In addition, even if the setting key switch is turned on when the game is in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If becomes, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when the game does not progress, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

In addition, the condition for not shifting to the probability setting value confirmation mode is set to be during the game, but the condition is not limited to this, and the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game controlled by the game control device 100. Anything can be used as long as it selects whether or not to do so. For example, in the case of a high probability state, it is possible not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. Further, as will be described later, the probability setting value confirmation mode may not be entered when a predetermined abnormality has occurred.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played on a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to set a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state in which it is prohibited to start the confirmation state, the operation unit It means that even if it is in the predetermined state, it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the prohibited state is a state in which the game is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, the prohibited state is a state in which a special gaming state is in progress. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be easily won, and the right to execute the game can be generated by winning, and the predetermined conditions are satisfied. The hit state (normal map hit state) in which the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state when the normal variable winning device 37 is executed and the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result is determined based on the above. A normal variable winning device control means (game control device 100) that can be generated is provided, and the prohibited state is a state in which the normal figure game is being executed or a hit state is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being known while the game is in progress, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to the predetermined state in the state where the state of the game controlled by the control means is the prohibited state, and the prohibited state ends while the predetermined state is set, the prohibited state is set. It will be in the confirmation state based on the end. Therefore, if the game does not progress, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning. Figure Fluctuation display Predetermine the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the game. The game result pre-judgment is performed.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning opening device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

If the special figure game processing number is "0" in step A7, the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change are in progress. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
When the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A10) for setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the big winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A12) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big hit end processing are performed. The large winning opening residual ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the big hit end process (step A14) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A16) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. ..
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", the processing for setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end processing are performed. The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the special drawing normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. .. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. , End the special figure game processing. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19, and subsequent processing is performed. conduct.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time reduction is in progress (during normal electric support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is not in progress (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special time reduction is in progress (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing the effect to strike by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning monitoring table for the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning to the second starting port. Determination (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize for the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, the ordinary variation. When it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning of the game ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step. The process proceeds to the process of A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the electric power fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), information on the starting port to be monitored without winning is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the special start port switch common process, first, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is input to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A135; Y). Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has been won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol of the RWM is extracted and prepared. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is performed. finish.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a starting storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 17, first, the start opening winning flag saved in step A137 of the special drawing start opening switch common process is checked, and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) has won a prize. (Step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not to the first starting port (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special time is being shortened (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit is in progress (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is in progress (step A153; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is not in progress or the small hit is not occurring (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start port (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the first starting port (step A158; Y), whether or not the jackpot random value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to the process of step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated.

The big hit determination process in step A157 and the small hit determination process in step A159 are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 20 and 21 which are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process. That is, the determination is made according to the set probability setting value. Further, the special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special map normal processing.

Through the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command containing the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment, etc.) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only at the start prize when the start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A309), and when the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A309). A309; N) sets the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and an effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316), and the special figure normal processing is terminated. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300.
On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309; Y), the process proceeds to step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

If the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is prepared (step A302). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.
If the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" in step A305 (step A305; N), a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 is prepared (step A306). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A308) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, if the special figure 2 hold number is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 19A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321), and the first step is made. To set the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and to determine whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the misalignment information and the small hit information in the small hit flag of is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area (step A332). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A333). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 19A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 19B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area (step A352). Here, 100 ms) is set (step A353). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

In addition, when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the information of the set probability setting value may be referred to. This makes it possible to perform an effect of suggesting or notifying the probability set value, such as selecting a fluctuation pattern according to the probability set value or making the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern different according to the probability set value.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination process performed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20, in this jackpot determination process, first, an upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A381). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability set value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value. The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A382), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value is different depending on the probability setting value or the probability state. Is also good. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be collectively used as a judgment value table.

When the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. It should be noted that the loss in step A389 means that it is not a big hit, and there is a possibility that it is determined as a small hit in a later small hit determination process. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A383; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A384). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A384; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is acquired (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). ). Further, in the case of not in the high probability state (step A384; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A386), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387). .. The upper limit determination value to be acquired here is acquired with reference to the upper limit determination value table set in step A381 described above.

When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A387; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A389), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process performed in the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 21, in this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A401). The small hit upper limit determination value is set for each probability set value. In addition, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. Further, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402). Here, the value of the small hit lower limit determination value is the same even if the probability setting value is different. When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A402; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; Y), a deviation is set as the determination result (step A404), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A403; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A405), and the small hit determination process is completed. do.

As in the case of the big hit judgment, the small hit upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value may be set first, and the small hit upper limit judgment value may be acquired from the set upper limit judgment value table. , The upper limit judgment value in the big hit judgment and the small hit upper limit judgment value in the small hit judgment may be collectively specified in the judgment value table provided for each probability set value. Further, although the value of the small hit lower limit judgment value is the same even if it is a different probability setting value, the small hit lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value. In this case, it depends on the probability setting value. And select the lower limit judgment value for small hits.

Further, the probability setting values referred to in the process of setting the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381) and the process of setting the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A401) are shown. If the value is an abnormal value that does not correspond to any probability setting value, the setting may be made assuming that it is a predetermined probability setting value (for example, setting 1), or it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred. The game may be stopped and an error notification may be performed. In addition, although the probability setting value is referred to for each judgment of big hit and each judgment of small hit, the upper limit value setting table corresponding to the set probability setting value when the probability setting value is set in the probability setting value change state. Or, a process of setting a small hit upper limit determination value may be performed, and this may only be referred to when determining a large hit or when determining a small hit.

[Processing during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special figure change processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the change symbol discrimination flag (special figure 1 change flag or special figure 2 change flag) is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting is performed. Processing is performed (step A602). That is, the symbol stop command forming the stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the variation time of the special figure variation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. Upon receiving this symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game, and stops and displays the result.

After that, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 msec regardless of whether the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop symbol pattern. .. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, the process number "2" related to the process during display of the special figure is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol) is saved. 2 Save the fluctuating signal (OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A608), and set the symbol for the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal. Save the value (eg 256 ms) (step A609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, in the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM The process of clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process are loaded. (Step A703), the process of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704) is performed. Then, when it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A705) and it is determined to be a jackpot (step A705; Y), the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the second special figure variation display game is started. (For example, ON the signal during operation of the condition device, ON the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device, ON the signal per special symbol 2) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708). The round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706), and the jackpot is a jackpot (step A706). If it is determined to be A706; Y), a test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is turned on, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is turned on, (Turn on the signal per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. Save in the upper limit area of the number of rounds of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information in which the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is set to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step) is prepared. A717) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of this embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1), and the big hit without a big hit (so-called sudden big hit, etc. When the information is the big winning opening opening information 1), it is turned ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it is turned OFF otherwise. Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are set. It is set (step A719), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the large winning opening large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A724) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It is a means for generating a special game state that generates a state.

On the other hand, in step A706, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), a high probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state. The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is high by performing the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A726) for updating the value (high probability fluctuation number) and the effect mode information check process (step A727) for setting the effect mode. It is determined whether it is a stochastic state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special map is not high (step A728; N), the decorative special map command is loaded from the decorative special map command area, prepared (step A729), and the effect command is set. The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is in high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Next, "7" related to the small hit fanfare processing is set as the processing number (step A734), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A735).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A736), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output as ON (big hit + small hit). )) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A737), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A739), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A740).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (turning on the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A741), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A742), and the process of displaying the special figure is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high-probability state. The high probability fluctuation number update process (step A743) for updating the area value (high probability fluctuation number) and the effect mode information check process (step A744) for setting the effect mode are performed, and the remaining rotation for switching corresponding to the effect mode number is performed. A number is set (step A745), and it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A746). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
When it is determined in step A746 that the production remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A746; N), "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A747). ), The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A750), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A751). Then, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A752), and the special figure display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A746 that the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation match (step A746; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A747), and the effect command is set. After performing the process (step A748), the process proceeds to the process of step A749. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure game processing (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the Fuzu game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. Perform the monitoring process (step B2). Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

When the value of the normal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, when it is determined that the time has been up or has already been timed up, it is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the normal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal figure game process number (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, a subroutine call is made according to the normal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting and the effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the normal map fluctuation are in progress. Performs normal processing (step B8) for setting information necessary for processing.
Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, the normal power release time is set according to whether or not the time is shortened. In addition, the normal map display processing (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "3", the normal figure hitting process is continued, or the information necessary for performing the normal electric remaining ball processing is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

Further, in step B7, when the normal map game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing per end processing is performed.
Further, in step B7, when the normal figure game processing number is "5", the normal figure per end process (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process (step) related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 53. Perform B15) to end the normal map game processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to the process of step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed. conduct.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B8) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301), and when the normal figure holding number is “0” (step B301; Y). ) Set "0" for the normal processing of the normal figure as the processing number (step B322), and save the processing number in the normal drawing game processing number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the normal processing of the normal map is terminated.

When the number of reserved figures is not "0" (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the hit random number storage area (for the number of holds 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holds 1) of the RWM. The loaded area, that is, the hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) are cleared to 0 (step B302), and the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game is It is determined whether the normal probability (that is, the low probability of the normal figure) is higher than the high probability of the normal figure, that is, the time is shortened (step B303).

When the normal probability is not high (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit judgment value) at the low probability of the normal figure is set (step B304), and when the normal probability is high (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit determination value (high probability lower limit determination value) at the time of high probability in the normal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306), and if the value of the hit random number is not equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (step B306; N), the value of the hit random number is step B304 or B305. It is determined whether or not it is less than the lower limit determination value set in (step B307).

When the value of the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B306; Y), or when the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; Y), the hit flag Save the outlier information in the area (step B308), set the outlier stop symbol number (step B309), save the outlier symbol information in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B310), and stop the stop symbol number in the normal symbol. Save in the symbol area (step B314).
On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311), and the hit loaded in step B302. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B312), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol number is set to the normal symbol stop symbol. Save to the area (step B314).

In the case of this embodiment, the probability of hit at the time of low probability of normal map is 0/251, the probability of hit at the time of high probability of normal map is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is "251", and the lower probability judgment value is low probability. "251", the high probability lower limit determination value is "1". Therefore, when the probability is low, the value of the hit random number will be different in all cases of "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability in the normal figure, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the hit random number is "0" is out of the question.
Further, in the case of this embodiment, there are two types of hit symbols.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, a process of moving up the ranks of the number of reserved numbers 2 to 4 held after the number of reserved numbers 1 by one as the game for displaying the fluctuation of the number of normal figures related to the oldest number of reserved numbers 1 is executed. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 in the random number storage area for the normal figure to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B320). Then, the normal map changing process transition setting process (step B321) for shifting to the normal map changing process is performed, and the normal map normal process is terminated. That is, the game execution means by which the game control device 100 executes the normal map variation display game as the variable display game (based on the normal map start memory) based on the detection of the game ball at the normal map start gate 34 (inflow region). Make a game.
In the case of the present embodiment, in step B320, the fluctuation time is set to 500 msec with a probability of 200/256, 1500 msec with a probability of 40/256, and 3000 msec with a probability of 16/256. ..

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the normal map changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" related to the normal map display process (step B401), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area. (Step B402). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 600 msec), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display 53, is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B403), and the fluctuation of the normal map ends. The signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the stop flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is stopped is set in the normal figure fluctuation control flag area. Save (step B405), and end the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" related to normal processing is set as the processing number (step B515), and the processing number is saved in the normal drawing game processing number area (step). B516). After that, the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the process of displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, "0"). Or "5") and save it in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the value of the hit end pointer corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information (for example, “4” or “7”) is acquired and saved in the normal figure hit end pointer area (step B506). Next, the normal power release time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

Next, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal processing per map (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B509). After that, a signal relating to the start of hitting the solenoid fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the normal symbol 1) and a signal relating to the start of operating the solenoid (for example, turning on the signal during operation of the solenoid electric accessory 1) are set as test signals. The on-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B511) in order to save the data in the output data area (step B510) and output the signal for driving (on) the solenoid solenoid.

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B512), and the number of winnings in the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the illegal winning number area (step B513). Then, a flag (a flag outside the fraud monitoring period) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing during display of the normal map is terminated.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is equal to or higher than the upper limit value. (Step B602).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the value of the control pointer per normal figure (step). Branch processing is performed according to the value before updating by +1 in B603 (step B604).
Further, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the process per normal control pointer area in step B603 is not updated by +1 and is hit the normal figure. Branch processing is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B604).

When the value of the control pointer is "0", "2" or "5", the process proceeds to step B605 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The wait time after the 37 is closed is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B605), and the off-data is saved in the normal electric solenoid output data area (step B606) in order to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c. End the process during drawing.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B607 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is used. The opening time is saved in the normal power opening time in the normal power game processing timer area (step B607), and the on-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c (step B608). Ends the process during normal operation.

Further, when the value of the control pointer is "6", it is the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer in order to move to step B609 and control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. To save the normal power release time in the normal power release time in the normal power game processing timer area (step B609) and turn on the normal power solenoid 37c, save the on-data in the normal power solenoid output data area (step B610), and hit the normal power figure. End the process.

If the value of the control pointer is "4" or "7", the process proceeds to step B611, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing is performed. Is set to "4" (step B611). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B612), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area (step B613). After that, in order to turn off the solenoid solenoid 37c, the off-data is saved in the output data area of the solenoid solenoid (step B614), and the process of hitting the drawing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, in step B605, the wait time is 300 msec, in step B607, the normal power release time is 1700 msec, in step B609, the normal power release time is 2600 msec, and in step B613. It saves 600msec as the processing time for the remaining spheres of the Fuden.
Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "4" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "1700 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "1700 msec", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "0", the wait time is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "1", so that the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "2", so that it takes 300 msec. The wait time is set, then the normal control pointer is updated to "3", so the normal power is released for 1700 msec, and then the normal control pointer is updated to "4", so 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set.

Further, when the normal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 2", "5" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the normal figure display process shown in FIG. 28, and the normal figure display process is performed. In step B506, "7" is acquired as the value of the hit end pointer, and in step B507 of the processing during display of the normal map, "2600 ms" is acquired as the normal power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 msec, the normal power release time is "2600 msec", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then, since the control pointer is "5", the wait time is 300 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "6", so that the normal power is released for 2600 msec, and then the control pointer for hitting the normal map is updated to "7", so that it is 600 msec. The remaining ball processing time of the normal electric power is set. That is, the game control means 100 executes a normal figure game (normal figure variation display game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the normal figure game becomes a specific result, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened. It serves as a control means for a normal variable winning device that can generate a hit state (normal figure hit state) to be converted.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S117) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S111), winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S107), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S115), and panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S116) are used. Based on this, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the external information editing process, first, when the glass frame opening error has not occurred (step S801; N) and the main body frame opening error has not occurred (step S802; N), , The off-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y), or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is externally transmitted. It is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to the process of step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (. Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is cleared in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809), and step S810 is performed. Move to the processing of. Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process of step S810 is performed without the process of step S809. Transition.

Then, when the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), and the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), it is common. When the electric fraud is occurring (step S813; Y) or when the big prize opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S814; Y). Step S817), the on-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither magnet fraud has occurred (step S810; N), panel radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S811; N), frame radio wave fraud has not occurred (step S812; N), and general electric wave fraud has not occurred. (Step S813; N), when the large winning opening fraud has not occurred (step S814; N), it is determined whether or not a switch abnormality has occurred (step S815).
When a switch error is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S818), and the process proceeds to step S819. If the switch error is not occurring (step S815; N), the off-data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S816), and the process proceeds to step S819.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S819) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S820) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol confirmation number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is "0" (step S822).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is "0" (step S822; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S823), the external information editing process is terminated.
If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not "0" (step S822; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step). S824), the external information editing process is terminated.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 32 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the initial setting of the CPU is performed (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP312 is performed (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, the effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the effect content is changed.

Then, the hall / player setting mode processing for accepting operations such as setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the player is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In the present embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is inserted twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, the sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of the sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and the control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 are performed. The decorative control process (step C18) to be performed, the movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 are performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 33 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (step C201), and the command is received. It is determined whether or not the number is not 0 (step C202). Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. (Step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to create a space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to the process of step C204. When it is determined that the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 34 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether the MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that the MODE and the ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is the correct combination (step C234).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and C233 that the MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step). At C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C235 that the MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in the range of the jackpot command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command process (step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not in the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), MODE determines whether it is in the range of single-shot commands such as hold count commands and error commands. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot command (step C241; Y), the single-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the one-shot command (step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol system command process (step C244) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is in the range of the look-ahead variable system command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the start memory (holding) in which the special figure change display game has not been executed becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be used. It is a production such as performing a production display. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

In addition, commands related to power-on and commands related to probability setting values are processed by single-shot command processing. Examples of commands related to power-on include commands for recovering from a power failure and commands for initializing RAM. Examples of the command related to the probability setting value include commands for changing the probability setting, changing the probability setting value, ending the probability setting change, checking the probability setting value, and ending the confirmation of the probability setting value.

In the above first embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, but the setting key switch 152 is turned on after the power is turned on. Even in the case of, the probability setting value may be changed to the changed state. However, since the RAM is initialized when the probability setting value change state ends, either the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the normal figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special game state is being played, or the normal figure is being hit. It may be a condition that it does not correspond to. Further, it may be a condition that the customer is waiting. Further, when the operation handle 24 is operated and there is an input from the touch switch, it may not be possible to shift to the probability set value change state.

Further, although the initialization of the RAM 111C is performed when the probability setting value change state ends, the initialization of the RAM 111C may not be performed except when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the data of the RAM 111C.

Further, although the probability values corresponding to each probability setting value are different, the same probability value may be assigned to different probability setting values. FIG. 35A shows the probability setting value in this embodiment. The value in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111C is set to take a value of 0 to 5. The same applies to the working probability setting value area. Settings 1 to 6 are assigned as probability setting values corresponding to the values in the probability setting value area. The display of the probability set value display device 153 displays 1 to 6 corresponding to the value of the probability set value. Different probability values are assigned to the probability values in settings 1 to 6.

FIG. 35B shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, the probability values of settings 1 to 3 are assigned as settings 4 to 6. Therefore, it is practically possible to switch the probability value in three stages. Other than this, it is the same as in FIG. 35 (a). By doing so, when the 6-step probability value is unnecessary, only the probability value needs to be different, and the design can be easily changed.

It should be noted that it is free to assign which probability value to which probability setting value, and for example, setting 1 and setting 6, setting 2 and setting 5, and setting 3 and setting 4 may be the same probability value. Since the value in the probability setting value area (working probability setting value area) is updated by +1 by operating the setting value change button, the order of the probability values that change when the setting value change button is operated differs by changing the assignment. It becomes an order. Further, for example, if the same probability value as the other probability setting values is assigned to the two probability setting values, the change stage can be set to 4 stages, and any stage of 1 to 6 can be set.

FIG. 35 (c) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, what was set 4 to 6 in FIG. 35B is set to setting 1 to setting 3, and the display on the probability setting value display device 153 is also set to 1 to 3 correspondingly. As a result, the display of the probability set value display device 153 and the probability value correspond to each other, and it is possible to make it easier for the person in charge of the work to grasp the probability value.

FIG. 35 (d) also shows an example in which the allocation of probability values is different. In this example, all the settings are 1, the display of the probability setting value display device 153 is all 1, and the probability values are all the same. That is, it is possible to set only one probability value substantially, and even if the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary, it is possible to deal with it only by setting the value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100. In this case, the same display is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 even if the setting value change button is operated, but the operation can be performed by performing the specific display (for example, blank display) as described above. It will be easier for workers to know that it has been accepted.

Although the number of values in the probability setting value region is set to 6, any number other than this may be used. For example, in the case of FIGS. 35 (b) and 35 (c), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be three. Further, in the case of FIG. 35 (d), the number of values in the probability setting value region may be one. Further, in order to make it possible to set a larger number of steps, the number of values in the probability setting value region may be 7 or more. Further, although the probability setting value to which the probability value is assigned is selected, the probability value may be selected. In this case, the selected probability value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.

In addition, the probability value of the big hit is assigned according to the probability setting value, but the probability value of the small hit is also assigned, and the probability value of the small hit is also changed in response to the change of the probability setting value. ing. The probability value of the big hit and the probability value of the small hit corresponding to each probability set value can be determined independently. However, when only big hits and small hits are made as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, it is necessary to set the probability value of the small hit according to the probability value of the big hit. Further, the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the big hit and the probability setting value for setting the probability value of the small hit may be set separately. Further, the probability value of the small hit may be a constant value regardless of the probability setting value. Further, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map fluctuation display game may be set according to the probability setting value that defines the probability value of the big hit, or may be set independently.

Further, when the setting value change button, the setting key operation unit, the probability setting value display device 153, and the like are provided on the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100, the function of changing the probability value is unnecessary. This setting sub-board may be removed, and a sub-board or the like that has undergone termination processing such as GND connection may be connected to the connection portion with the setting sub-board of the game control device 100. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate only the function of changing the probability value without changing the configuration of the game control device 100, and it is possible to reduce the cost. Further, in a gaming machine having no probability fluctuation function, an operation probability M may be provided for each probability set value.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the gaming control device 100 transmits a command to instruct the payout control device 200 to pay out when the power is turned on.

The payout control device 200 in this modification is provided with a storage means capable of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off. The storage means stores information on the payout command received from the game control device 100, and pays out based on the information stored here. In this way, since the storage means of the payout control device 200 can hold the stored contents in the power-off state, the game control device 100 sequentially transmits the payout commands regardless of the state of the payout busy signal. .. Therefore, the information of the unpaid payout command is stored in the storage means of the payout control device 200.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the main process shown in FIG. 36 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28), the payout instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the payout control device 200. (Step S81). The payout control device 200 starts paying out based on the information backed up in its own storage means based on receiving the command of the payout instruction. By doing so, even if the backup data of the game control device 100 is damaged, the payout can be performed based on the information stored in the payout control device 200, and it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from being impaired. can.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command of the setting change instruction, in addition to the notification prompting the change of the probability set value, the notification that the payout may be performed is also performed. May be. Further, the command (specific information) of the payout instruction is transmitted to the payout control device 200 not only in the above case, but for example, in the case of transmitting the command whose probability setting is being changed in FIG. 6 to the effect control device 300 (step). S40) or when the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S44), the payout instruction command (specific information) may be transmitted to the payout control device 200.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the predetermined conditions, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. The game control means (game control device 100) for controlling, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game based on the information from the game control means, and the probability value used for the lottery of the game are assigned. A setting means (setting means) that enables the selected probability setting value to be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The game control device 100) and the payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls the payout of the game medium based on the payout information from the game control means, and the game control means stores the stored contents even when the power is cut off. A storage means (RAM 111C) capable of holding the information, a validity determination means (game control device 100) for determining whether the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, and a probability set value are selected. The information stored in the storage means is not legitimate by the validation means, including the initialization means (game control device 100) capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation unit for performing the operation. When the determination is made, the specific information is transmitted to the effect control means and the payout control means to stop the control of the game, and the effect control means notifies the selection of the probability set value based on the reception of the specific information. The payout control means is provided with a payout information storage means that can retain the stored contents even when the power is cut off and can store the payout information received from the game control means, and when the specific information is received, it is stored in the payout information storage means. It means that the control to pay out the game medium is performed based on the payout information. Therefore, it is possible to promote the return to the normal state and not to impair the profit obtained by the player. Further, when the RAM 111C is initialized, the information of the probability set value set in the game store is also lost and the initial value is set, but it is initialized by performing a notification prompting the selection of the probability set value. It is possible to prevent the game store from leaving the unintended probability setting value in the set state.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is prepared with a plurality of conditions for determining the selected probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 37 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, a confirmation condition monitoring process (step S450) for monitoring whether or not the condition for determining the selected probability setting value is satisfied is performed.

[Determining condition monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation condition monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (step S411), and when there is an input from the touch switch (step S411; Y). ) Clears the end wait flag (step S457), performs the processes of steps S412 to S415, and ends the confirmation condition monitoring process.

That is, when the worker performs the first operation of touching the operation handle 24, the first definite condition on condition of the input from the touch switch is satisfied, and the selected probability setting value is set. The end wait flag is a flag used to monitor the establishment of the second confirmation condition as described later, and here, the second confirmation condition is satisfied because the first confirmation condition on the condition of input from the touch switch is satisfied. Since it is no longer necessary to monitor, the end wait flag is cleared.

On the other hand, when there is no input from the touch switch (step S411; N), that is, when the first determination condition is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not there is an end waiting flag (step S451). If there is an end wait flag (step S451; Y), the process proceeds to step S455. In this case, the monitoring of the second definite condition has already started. If there is no end wait flag (step S451; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452).

If the setting key switch is not in the off state (step S452; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the probability setting value change state continues. When the setting key switch is in the off state (step S452; Y), the initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is saved in the change end timer area (step S453), and the end wait flag is set (step S454).

After that, if the change end timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S455), and it is determined whether the change end timer is 0 (step S456). If the change end timer is not 0 (step S456; N), the confirmation condition monitoring process is terminated. When the change end timer is 0 (step S456; Y), the processing after step S457 is performed, and the confirmation condition monitoring processing is terminated. That is, the second definite condition is satisfied and the selected probability setting value is set when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation of turning off the setting key switch performing the second operation is performed. It has become so.

As described above, in this modification, the probability setting value selected by satisfying either the first definite condition or the second definite condition is set as the probability setting value used for the game. Until these confirmation conditions are satisfied, the selected probability setting value is stored in the working probability setting value area, and the information in the probability setting value area in which the probability setting value used in the game is stored is changed. not. Therefore, if the power is cut off before the determination condition is satisfied, the selected probability setting value is discarded and the original probability setting value is set.

In the probability setting value change state, the operation handle 24 may be touched to notify that the selected probability setting value is set. This notification may be always performed in the state where the probability setting value is changed, or may be performed only in the state where the end wait flag is set. Further, the first definite condition and the second definite condition are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the second confirmation condition may be set only when the setting key switch is turned off. Further, a probability setting value selected by preparing three or more definite conditions and satisfying any of them may be set.

Further, although it is assumed that the original probability setting value is set when the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, a predetermined probability setting value may be set. For example, if the information in the probability setting value area is set to the initial value (for example, setting 1) based on the start of the probability setting value change state, and the power is cut off before the confirmation condition is satisfied, this initial value. May be set. In this case, an arbitrary probability setting value can be set in advance as the initial value, but for example, the same probability as the probability setting value set when the area for the probability setting value of the RAM 111C is initialized. It may be a set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means satisfies any one of a plurality of determination conditions. It means that the probability setting value selected based on is set. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value. In addition, by providing a plurality of definite conditions, the degree of freedom of work can be increased, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved.

Further, if the power supply is cut off before any one of the plurality of determination conditions is satisfied, the setting means does not set the selected probability setting value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of definite conditions include a first definite condition and a second definite condition, the first definite condition is that a predetermined first operation has been performed, and the second definite condition is the first operation. Is that a predetermined time elapses after a different predetermined second operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to surely change the probability set value.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification does not have a setting key operation unit in the setting means, and does not have a setting key switch 152. In addition, the conditions for transitioning to a changeable state in which the probability setting value can be changed are different.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 39 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this process, when the backed up information is normal and the probability setting value is not changed (step S21; N), is the setting value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier? Is determined (step S61).

When the set value change switch is not in the ON state (step S61; N), the process proceeds to step S30 in FIG. 6 in order to perform processing when the power is normally restored from the power failure. Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S61; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S62). As will be described later, in the transition determination process, it is determined whether the transition condition to the probability setting value change state is satisfied, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the probability setting value changing flag is set. ..

When the flag for changing the probability set value is set in the transition determination process (step S63; Y), the figure is used to perform the process of initializing the RAM and the process of changing the probability set value so that the set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of 6. In this modification, since the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process, the process of step S37 does not have to be performed. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S63; N), the process proceeds to step S41 of FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control.

On the other hand, if the backed up information is not normal, is the set value change switch turned on from the state of the third input port 124 read earlier after setting the RAM clear start address 1 (step S25)? Is determined (step S64). When the setting value change switch is not in the ON state (step S64; N), the setting change instruction command (specific information) is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S28) to prohibit RAM access. (Step S29), the control is stopped and the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

Further, when the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S64; Y), the transition determination process is performed (step S65). This transition determination process is the same process as in step S62. When the probability setting value changing flag is set in the transition determination process (step S66; Y), in order to perform the RAM initialization process and the process of changing the probability set value so that the probability set value can be changed. The process proceeds to step S35 of FIG. If the probability setting value changing flag is not set in the transition determination process (step S66; N), the process proceeds to step S27.

[Transition judgment processing]
FIG. 40 shows the transition determination process (steps S62, S65) in the above-mentioned main process. In this transition determination process, first, the initial value (for example, 30 seconds) is saved in the transition standby timer area (step S71), the state of the input port 1 is read (step S72), and it is determined whether the transition condition is satisfied (step S72). Step S73).

In this modification, the staff can shift to the probability set value change state by putting the game balls into the winning area in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, and the winning area provided in the game area 32 is provided. From the state of the input port 1 to which the detection signal from is input, it is determined whether or not this transition condition is satisfied. When this transition condition is satisfied (step S73; Y), the probability setting value changing flag is set (step S76), and the transition determination process is terminated. As a result, the probability setting value is changed.

If the transition condition is not satisfied (step S73; N), the transition standby timer is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (step S74), and it is determined whether the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75). .. If the transition wait timer is not 0 (step S75; N), the process returns to step S72. That is, the detection signal from the winning area is monitored for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

If the transition standby timer is 0 (step S75; Y), the transition determination process ends. That is, if the transition condition is not satisfied within the predetermined time, the transition determination process is terminated without setting the probability setting value changing flag. As a result, if the backed up data is normal, the process proceeds to step S41 in FIG. 6 in order to perform the process of initializing the RAM area for game control, and if the backed up data is abnormal. Will stop the control after the processing of steps S28 and S29 is performed.

The transition conditions may or may not be changed at the amusement store. Further, although the transition condition is set to put the game balls in the winning area in a predetermined order, a predetermined number of game balls may be put in the predetermined winning area regardless of the order. Further, a predetermined detection by one detection means may be a transition condition. In this case, it may be a condition that only the detection by the detection means has been detected, or it may be a predetermined condition that the detection means has detected a plurality of times in a predetermined mode (number of detections, detection interval, etc.). ..

Further, although the detection sensor in the winning region is used as the detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, other detection sensors may be used. For example, the touch sensor of the operation handle 24 or the set value change switch 151 may be enabled. However, it is preferable that the transition condition includes detection by a detection means that the player cannot freely operate during the game, such as a detection sensor in the winning area.

Further, a plurality of DIP switches are provided at positions that can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and are used as detection means used to satisfy the transition condition, and the transition is made when the state of each DIP switch is a predetermined state. The condition may be satisfied. Further, the keyboard may be provided at a position where the keyboard can be operated only when the front frame 12 is opened and used as a detection means used to establish the transition condition, and the transition condition may be satisfied by the password input from the keyboard. ..

In addition, only when the setting value change switch 151 is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the establishment of the transition condition is monitored and the transition to the probability setting value changing state is possible, but the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Even when the set value change switch 151 is not turned on, it may be possible to monitor the establishment of the transition condition and shift to the probability set value change state. In this case, the period for monitoring the establishment of the transition condition may always be set based on the power-on of the gaming machine, or the transition condition when the setting value change switch 151 is operated after the power is turned on. You may start a period to monitor the establishment of.

From the above, in a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives the player a game value when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game becomes a special result. The detection means used (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and the probability setting value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned. , Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). The setting means enables the selection of the probability setting value when the detection means detects a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

In addition, it is used in a game in a game machine capable of generating a special game state in which a game is executed based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, which gives the player a game value. A plurality of detection means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switch 35a, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, large winning opening switch 38a) and a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a game lottery is assigned. A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values based on the operation of the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151)). In addition, the setting means enables selection of a probability setting value when a plurality of detection means detect a predetermined mode. Therefore, since the detection of the predetermined mode by the detection means has the same function as the setting key, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being changed illegally. In addition, the number of gaming machines that can simultaneously execute the probability setting value change work is not limited to the number of setting keys, and the probability setting value can be changed simultaneously on multiple gaming machines, resulting in work efficiency. Is improved.

The setting means makes it possible to select the probability set value when the detection means detects the predetermined mode within a certain period after the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

Further, the plurality of detection means cannot be operated by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally changed.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value is changed by the set value change operation unit configured by the DIP switch.

The DIP switch forming the set value changing operation unit is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front frame 12 is open, and the input state thereof is input to the CPU 111A. As shown in FIG. 41, three DIP switches SW1 to SW3 are provided as set value change operation units, and the state of the DIP switch corresponding to each probability set value is defined.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the probability set value change process shown in FIG. 42 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change process, it is determined whether the state of the set value change operation unit has changed (step S461), and if it has changed (step S461), the value in the work probability setting value area is set to the corresponding value. (Step S462). As a result, the desired probability setting value is set by operating the setting value changing operation unit during the probability setting value changing state and ending the probability setting value changing state as a state corresponding to the desired probability setting value. Will be.

By using the DIP switch in this way, the work of setting a desired probability set value becomes easy, and the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance. Since the set probability set value can be grasped at a glance, the probability set value display device 153 may not be provided. Further, a cover covering the DIP switch may be attached so that the state of the DIP switch is not immediately visible when the front frame 12 is opened.

Further, in order to make it easier to grasp the state of each DIP switch, a confirmation LED may be provided corresponding to each DIP switch so that it lights up when the corresponding DIP switch is ON. Further, the confirmation LED may be turned on all the time, or may be turned on only in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode.

In addition, the set value change operation unit is not limited to the DIP switch, but may be a toggle switch or a rotary type switch, and any switch can be used as long as the probability set value can be grasped by visually recognizing the state of each switch. Anything is fine.

Further, although the probability setting value is changed depending on the state of the setting key switch 152, it is possible to shift to the probability setting value change state depending on the state of the setting value change switch 151 as in the third modification described above, and the predetermined time is set. The probability setting value change state may be terminated with the passage of. In this case, the probability setting value may be set based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit when the predetermined time has elapsed, or based on the state of the setting value changing operation unit at the time when the predetermined confirmation operation is performed. The probability setting value may be set.

In addition, when the probability setting value is not changed, the currently set probability setting value is compared with the state of the setting value change operation unit, and monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the two states match. Is also good. The monitoring process may be performed at all times when the probability set value is not changed, or may be performed only at a predetermined time such as when the power is turned on or when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. In addition, it may be performed regularly at regular intervals. When it is determined by the monitoring process that the two states do not match, the notification that an abnormality has occurred may be given, or the game may be stopped.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification cannot play a game when the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A for enabling the change of the probability setting value is broken. ..

In this modification, a setting sub-board serving as a setting means including a setting value change button, a setting key operation unit, a probability setting value display device 153, and the like is provided, and this setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100. It has become like. For example, as shown in FIG. 43A, the wiring from the setting key switch 152 provided on the setting sub-board is connected to the game control device 100 via the connector 154. The setting value change switch 151 is not shown here.

FIG. 43A shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is closed and the input to the CPU 111A is set to LOW, and the input from the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state. Based on this, the probability setting value is not changed and the game can proceed. Further, in the gaming machine of this modification, an LED is provided as a confirmation means that makes it possible to visually recognize the state of the setting key switch 152. In the state of FIG. 14A, the confirmation means is turned off, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the off state.

FIG. 43B shows a case where the setting key of the setting key operation unit is in the second position. In this state, the setting key switch 152 is opened and the input to the CPU 111A is HI, so that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

As described above, the probability setting value is changed on the condition that the setting key of the setting key operation unit is set to the second position and the input from the setting key switch 152 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is configured. That is, the input of the ON state from the setting key switch 152 constitutes the specific operation information to be input based on the fact that the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, and is based on the input of this specific operation information. The probability setting value can be selected and the probability setting value is changed. In this probability setting value change state, the game cannot be progressed, and the game can be progressed by ending the probability set value change state.

FIG. 43 (c) shows the case where the wiring between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A is broken, and FIG. 43 (d) shows the case where the connector 154 is disconnected. In either case, the input to the CPU 111A is set to HI, and it is recognized that the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state. Further, the confirmation means is turned on, and it is possible to confirm that the setting key switch 152 is recognized as being in the ON state.

That is, since the state is the same as when the probability setting value can be changed, the specific operation information is input in this case as well. As a result, the probability set value is changed and the game cannot proceed. In this way, by making it possible to input specific operation information even when the wire is broken or the connector is disconnected, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding in the case of an abnormality. Further, since the confirmation means is lit even though the setting key of the setting key operation unit is not in the second position, it is possible to visually confirm that an abnormality has occurred.

Although the example in which the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 are connected by the connector 154 is given here, the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 may be directly connected without going through the connector 154. Further, although it is said that the setting auxiliary board provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like is provided separately from the game control device 100, the game control device 100 is provided with the setting key switch 152 and the like to provide the setting means. May be integrated with the game control device 100, and in this case as well, it is possible to detect disconnection between the setting key switch 152 and the CPU 111A and disconnection of the connector by the same configuration.

Further, here, the specific operation information is input when the connection between the setting key switch 152 and the game control device 100 is lost, but the specific operation is performed when the connection between the setting sub-board and the game control device 100 is lost. Information may be entered. Further, the setting sub-board may check the connection status of the setting key switch 152 or the like in the setting sub-board, and if there is an abnormality, the setting sub-board may output specific operation information.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value connected to the control means and assigned the probability value used for the lottery of the game are set by the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)). A setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating a value change button (setting value change switch 151)) is provided, and the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state. Based on this, the specific operation information is input to the control means so that the probability setting value can be selected, and the control means does not proceed with the game while the specific operation information is input. If the wiring between the setting means and the control means is broken, the specific operation information is input to the control means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

Further, when the power is turned on while the operation unit is operated so as to be in a specific state, the probability setting value can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally changing the probability set value.

[Sixth variant]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 44 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability set value confirmation process, when the game is in progress (step S433; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S474), and the probability set value confirmation process ends. Further, when the game is not in progress (step S433; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434), and when it is not in the on state (step S434; N), the off state confirmation flag is set. (Step S473), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated. This off state confirmation flag is information indicating that the setting key switch was in the off state when the game was not in progress.

Then, when the setting key switch is in the on state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471). When there is an off state confirmation flag (step S471; Y), the off state confirmation flag is cleared (step S472), the processing after step S435 is performed, and the mode shifts to the probability set value confirmation mode. On the other hand, when there is no off state confirmation flag (step S471; N), the probability set value confirmation process ends. That is, if the setting key switch is turned on during the game and the game is not in progress, the mode does not shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the setting key switch is turned off when the game is not in progress. When it changes to the on state, it shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode.

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on during the game, it is intended during the game in which the probability setting value confirmation mode cannot be transitioned. If the setting key switch is turned on without doing so, it can be prevented that the game is not in progress (not prohibited), the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode, and the probability setting value is displayed. .. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) is an operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) in a state where the state of the game controlled by the control means (game control device 100) is not prohibited. It means that the confirmation state is set only when the state of is changed to the predetermined state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[7th modification]
Next, a seventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has a RAM clear button as a third operation unit in addition to a setting key operation unit forming the first operation unit and a setting value change button forming the second operation unit. The signal from the RAM clear switch that detects the operation of the RAM clear button is input to the game control device 100. Further, the RAM clear button, like the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.

[Main processing]
In this modification, the main process shown in FIG. 45 is performed instead of the main process shown in FIG. In this main process, the process proceeds to step S41 when the RAM clear switch is on (the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed) (step S481; Y). That is, the RAM clear switch forms an operation unit for initializing the RAM 111C.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Further, instead of the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11, the probability setting value changing process shown in FIG. 46 is performed. In this probability setting value change processing, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch (in the ON state) (step S482; Y), the processing after step S412 is performed, and the processing for determining the selected probability setting value is performed. conduct.

In this way, the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the RAM clear button is pressed, and the probability set value can be confirmed by this RAM clear button, so that the RAM can be initialized. The work of determining the probability set value can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the amusement store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced.

In addition, when the setting key switch is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed and the RAM is initialized, whereas when the RAM clear button is operated when the power is turned on, the probability setting value is changed. Since it is possible to only initialize the RAM without shifting to the state, if you want to only initialize the RAM, you may need to operate the setting key switch or shift to the probability setting value change state. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in the amusement shop.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) includes a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value change button (setting value change switch 151), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch). )) Of the storage means (RAM111C) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the predetermined operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)) is operated. ) Can be initialized. Further, by operating a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), the selected probability setting value can be determined.

In addition, the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is controlled in a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives the player a gaming value. The control means (game control device 100) and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are the first operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the second operation unit (setting value). Setting means (game control device 100) that enables selection from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change button (setting value change switch 151)) and the third operation unit (RAM clear button (RAM clear switch)), and setting. A storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game by a control means including information of a probability set value selected by the means, and a closed state and an open state covering the front surface of the game machine 10. The main body frame (front frame 12) that can be converted and the open / close detecting means (game control device 100) that can detect the open / closed state of the main body frame are provided, and the control means is the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit is being operated, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized to initialize the main body. When the open / close detection means detects that the frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the third operation unit is operated, the probability set value cannot be changed. It means that the storage means is initialized. Therefore, when only the initialization of the RAM is desired, it is not necessary to change the probability set value, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved.

Further, when the control means is detected by the open / close detecting means when the main body frame is in the open state and the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated, the control means is used. The probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized. When the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detecting means, and the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in this state, the storage means is initialized without making it possible to change the probability set value. Therefore, even if the first operation unit and the third operation unit are operated at the same time, the probability set value can be changed to the changed state, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, when the main body frame is in the closed state, even if the first operation unit is operated, the probability setting value change state does not occur, so that fraudulent activity can be prevented.

In addition, in FIG. 45, by performing the state of the setting key switch before confirming the state of the RAM clear switch, even if the setting key operation unit and the RAM clear button are operated at the same time, the probability setting value is changed. However, it may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state that the setting key switch is on and the RAM clear switch is on. By making the operation of a plurality of operation units a condition, it is possible to clearly confirm the intention of shifting to the probability set value change state.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine of the first embodiment not provided with the RAM clear button, it is detected by the open / close detecting means that the main body frame is in the open state, and the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the probability set value can be changed and the storage means is initialized, and when the main body frame is closed, it is detected by the open / close detection means, and , When the power of the gaming machine is turned on while the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button are operated, the storage means is initialized without making the probability setting value changeable. It can be said that. In this case as well, the fact that the setting key switch is on and the setting value change switch is on may be a condition for shifting to the probability setting value change state.

Further, the setting means can change the probability setting value by operating the second operation unit. Further, the setting means can determine the selected probability setting value by operating the third operation unit.

In FIG. 46, the functions of the probability value change switch and the RAM clear switch may be exchanged. That is, when there is an input from the RAM clear switch, the processing after step S407 is performed, the selected probability setting value is changed, and when there is an input from the setting value change switch, the processing after step S412 is performed. , The process of fixing the selected probability setting value may be performed.

[8th modification]
Next, an eighth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is different in the operation of confirming the probability set value.

[Probability setting value change processing]
In this modification, the probability setting value change process shown in FIG. 47 is performed instead of the probability set value change process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value change processing, when the setting value change switch is operated in the first input mode (step S491; Y), the processing after step S407 is performed to change the selected probability setting value. Further, when the set value change switch is operated in the second input mode (step S492; Y), the processes after step S412 are performed, and the process of determining the selected probability set value is performed.

The first input mode here is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed within a predetermined time, and there is a first input mode when the pressing is completed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is changed when the set value change button is released (when the set value change switch 151 is changed to the off state) in a short pressing operation. The reason why the setting value change button is released is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated when the second input mode described below is performed.

Further, the second input mode is an input mode in which the set value change button is pressed and the pressing is completed in a predetermined time or longer, and there is a second input mode when the specified time has elapsed. I try to judge. That is, the probability set value is fixed when the pressing operation for a long time exceeding the specified time is performed (when the set value change switch 151 is turned on for the specified time or more).

In this way, the probability setting value can be selected and confirmed by the setting value change button, and the RAM 111C can be initialized by turning on the power while the setting value change button is pressed. The work of changing, confirming, and clearing the RAM can be selectively performed by using the minimum operation unit, and the work efficiency in the game store can be improved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the operation unit more than necessary, the cost of manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced, and the space for providing the operation unit can be reduced. The first input mode and the second input mode are not limited to the above-mentioned operations, and may be any operation as long as they can be discriminated from each other.

From the above, the setting means (game control device 100) has a predetermined operation unit among a plurality of operation units (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152), setting value changing button (setting value changing switch 151)). When the power of the gaming machine is turned on in the operated state, the storage means (RAM111C) can be initialized, and the selected probability setting value can be determined by operating a predetermined operation unit. Will be.

[9th modification]
Next, a ninth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification has different conditions for shifting to the probability set value confirmation mode.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 48 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined abnormality has occurred when the game is not in progress (step S433; N) (step S501). Then, when a predetermined abnormality has occurred (step S501; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated and the mode does not shift to the probability set value confirmation mode.

A predetermined abnormality can be arbitrarily set, but here, it is a magnet fraud, a panel radio wave fraud, a frame radio wave fraud, a general electric wave fraud, and a big prize opening fraud. If any of these abnormalities is occurring, it is determined that a predetermined abnormality has occurred. These anomalies are abnormalities caused by fraudulent activity, and by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when such anomalies occur, the probability setting value is known to the person who commits the fraudulent activity. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Further, the switch abnormality, the shoot ball breakage error, the overflow error, the payout abnormality error, and the glass frame opening error due to the occurrence of the connector disconnection are not included in the predetermined abnormality, but these may be included in the predetermined abnormality. Further, since the front frame 12 is opened to operate the setting key operation unit and the setting value change button, the front frame opening error is not included in the predetermined abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, when any of these abnormalities has occurred, a security signal forming specific external information is output to the outside, so that the game store side is notified of the occurrence of the abnormality. It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being known until the person in charge confirms the notification of the occurrence of this abnormality.

It should be noted that this security signal is output for a predetermined period even when the RAM 111C is initialized or when the probability set value confirmation mode is started to prompt the confirmation of the gaming machine. In the device outside the gaming machine, it becomes possible to grasp that a predetermined abnormality has occurred based on the output of the security signal for a predetermined time.

In addition, the probability setting value confirmation mode is not entered even if the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred, but the setting key switch is turned on when a predetermined abnormality has occurred. If all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the state is on, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode from that point. By doing so, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, by applying the configuration of the sixth modification described above, the probability setting value confirmation mode is shifted only when the setting key switch is changed from the off state to the on state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has not occurred. You can do it. In this case, the off state confirmation flag is cleared when the game is in progress (step S433; Y) and when a predetermined abnormality is occurring (step S501; Y).

In this way, by preventing the transition to the probability setting value confirmation mode when the setting key switch remains on from the state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred, it is prohibited to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode. If the setting key switch is unintentionally turned on while a predetermined abnormality is occurring, the probability setting value will be changed to a state in which all the predetermined abnormalities have been resolved (a state that is not a prohibited state). It is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed after shifting to the confirmation mode. That is, it is possible to make it possible to confirm the probability set value only when the operation is performed with the intention of confirming the probability set value.

From the above, in a game machine capable of executing a game based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to the player when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played. The control means (game control device 100) for controlling and the probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned are set to the operation unit (setting key operation unit (setting key switch 152)) and the setting value change button (setting value). A setting means (game control device 100) that can be selected from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating the change switch 151)) is provided, and the setting means is based on the fact that the operation unit is operated to set a predetermined state. , It is possible to set the confirmation state in which the probability set value can be confirmed, and when the state of the game controlled by the control means is a state in which a predetermined abnormality has occurred, the operation unit is in the predetermined state. Even so, it means that it is not in the confirmation state. Therefore, it becomes possible to select whether or not to shift to the probability setting value confirmation mode according to the state of the game, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by the probability setting value being shown.

Further, the predetermined abnormality includes a plurality of types of abnormalities, and the control means can output information to the outside of the gaming machine. If any of the predetermined abnormalities occurs, the predetermined abnormality is present. It means that the specific external information (security signal) is output to the outside until all are resolved. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a predetermined abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to notify the outside that the probability setting value cannot be confirmed, and the probability setting value is shown. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by this.

Further, a storage means (RAM111C) capable of storing information necessary for controlling a game is provided, and the control means stores specific external information for a predetermined period when the storage means is initialized and when the confirmation state is started. It means that it is output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine that a situation requiring confirmation of the gaming machine has occurred.

Further, in the setting means, when the operation unit is set to a predetermined state in a state where a predetermined abnormality has occurred and all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved while the predetermined state is maintained, all the predetermined abnormalities are resolved. Based on this, it will be in the confirmation state. Therefore, the probability set value can be automatically confirmed when a predetermined abnormality does not occur, so that the efficiency of the confirmation work can be improved.

Further, the setting means is set to the confirmation state only when the operation unit is changed to the predetermined state in the state where the predetermined abnormality has not occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally shown.

[10th modification]
Next, a tenth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification can shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
In this modification, the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 49 is performed instead of the probability set value confirmation process shown in FIG. In this probability setting value confirmation process, when the setting key switch is in the ON state (step S434; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in progress (step S511). If the game is not in progress (step S511; N), the process proceeds to step S435.

On the other hand, when the game is in progress (step S511; Y), the game interruption is set (step S512), the game interruption flag is set (step S513), and the process proceeds to step S435. As a result, it is possible to shift to the probability set value confirmation mode even during the game, and the game is interrupted during the probability set value confirmation mode.

Further, after performing the process of step S442, it is determined whether or not there is a game interruption flag (step S514). If there is no game interruption flag (step S514; N), that is, if the game is not interrupted, the probability set value confirmation process ends. If there is a game interruption flag (step S514; Y), that is, if the game is interrupted, the game restart is set (step S515), the game interruption flag is cleared (step S516), and the probability setting value is set. End the confirmation process. As a result, the game that has been interrupted with the end of the probability set value confirmation mode will be resumed.

In the state where the game is interrupted, the display of the batch display device 50 may be temporarily erased, or the state immediately before the interruption may be continued. Further, if the game is interrupted during the variable display of the special map variable display game or the normal map variable display game, the variable display on the batch display device 50 may be continued. Further, the batch display device 50 may be displayed to indicate that it is in a suspended state.

Further, when the game is interrupted, the interruption command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and when the game is resumed, the resume command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, so that the display device 41, voice, LED, etc. A light emitting member or a movable accessory may be used to produce an effect corresponding to the interruption. Further, the display or the like on the display device 41 when the game is restarted may be the same as the display or the like on the display device 41 when the power failure is restored.

Further, even during the interruption of the game, the winning to the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the general winning opening 35, and the special variable winning device 38 may be valid or invalid. Further, even if the game is interrupted, the payout of the game ball may be continued.

[11th modification]
Next, an eleventh modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain. The gaming machine of this modification is designed to output a sound accompanying a change in the probability set value.

FIG. 50A shows an example of changing the probability set value. When the power of the gaming machine is off, turn the setting key of the setting key operation unit to the second position to turn on the setting key switch (t11), and turn on the power of the gaming machine in this state. The value is changed (t12). Based on the setting value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command for which the probability setting is being changed to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 notifies that the probability setting value is in the change state based on the reception of this command. Outputs the notification voice during change. The changing notification voice may be any voice, and examples thereof include a voice saying "The probability setting value is being changed" and a specific music or alarm sound. Further, the display of the display device 41 and the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 also notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. Is also good. For example, the display device 41 may display "The probability setting value is being changed". That is, the effect device used in the game is used to notify that the probability set value is in the changed state. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is changed illegally during business, the clerk of the amusement store or the surroundings It can be noticed by the player and can prevent an illegal game from being performed.

Then, when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the first position to turn off the setting key switch, the probability setting value change state ends (t13). Based on the end of the set value change state, the game control device 100 sends a command to end the probability setting change to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 sets the probability setting change over a predetermined period (for example, 3 minutes) based on the reception of this command. The probability set value notification voice for notifying the information of the set probability set value is output (t13 to t14). After that, the sound is output according to the state of the game (t14).

The probability set value notification voice may be any voice, and as shown in FIG. 50 (b), for example, a voice corresponding to the set probability set value is output. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the voice "Probability setting value 1 has been set" is output. Of course, it may be a voice other than this, or it may be a specific music or an alarm sound. Further, the display device 41 also displays according to the probability setting value set in the same manner. For example, when the probability setting value is 1, the display "The probability setting value 1 has been set" is displayed. Of course, the display may be other than this.

In addition to this, the display of the sub information display device 90, the light emission of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the operation of the board effect device 44 are notified as corresponding to the set probability setting value. You may do so. That is, the probability set value is notified by using the effect device used in the game. By notifying using the effect device in this way, it is possible to clearly notify that the probability setting value has been changed, and even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the clerk of the game store or the surrounding games. A person can be aware of it, and it is possible to prevent an illegal game from being performed.

In addition, when the probability setting value is changed, the external information indicating that the probability setting value is changed is output so that the external device (such as a hall computer) can grasp that the probability setting value is changed. Is also good. Also, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, similarly, the external information indicating that the probability setting value confirmation mode is output is output so that the external device (hall computer, etc.) is in the probability setting value confirmation mode. It may be possible to grasp. By doing so, the game store can immediately grasp the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode, and can prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the game may not be allowed to proceed for a predetermined period after the end of the probability set value change state. Further, the probability set value notification voice may be output during the period during which the game cannot proceed. By doing so, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally. Further, in the case of the probability setting value confirmation mode, the speakers 19a and 19b, the display device 41, the sub information display device 90, the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, and the board effect device indicate that the probability setting value confirmation mode is used. It may be notified by a production device such as 44.

Further, the voice corresponding to the updated probability setting value may be output every time the probability setting value is updated by the operation in the probability setting value change state. Further, the other effect device may similarly notify the updated probability set value in response to the update of the probability set value. This makes it possible to easily confirm the selected probability setting value.

From the above, the game is executed on the basis of the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game is played in a game machine capable of generating a special game state that gives the player a game value. A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control) capable of selecting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit. The device 100) and an effect device (speakers 19a, 19b, display device 41, sub-information display device 90, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44) for producing a game are provided and selected. The probability set value can be notified by the effect device. Therefore, fraudulent activity can be prevented. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be changed. In addition, the effect device can notify that the probability set value can be confirmed.

In addition, after the end of the probability set value change state, the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the probability setting value is illegally changed during business, the game cannot be played immediately, and it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding illegally.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the portions having the same configuration.
The gaming machine of the second embodiment is different from the gaming machine of the first embodiment in that it is provided with a drying means for removing water adhering to the gaming ball.

As a result of diligent studies, the present inventors have determined that the rolling speed of the game ball changes depending on the humidity (strictly speaking, the moisture adhering to the game ball), and that the rolling speed of the game ball changes, which causes a winning slump. It was found that it is one of the factors (that is, the factor that the winning rate according to the design value cannot be stably realized).
The rolling speed of the game ball changes due to changes in the environment such as temperature, humidity, and the volume surrounding the game ball, or external factors such as resin and rubber that the game ball comes into direct contact with. For example, if a shelf made of resin is provided near the winning opening (starting winning opening or large winning opening), the rolling speed when the game ball rolls on the shelf changes. In some cases, a winning slump may occur in the winning opening. Therefore, in this embodiment, attention is paid to the environmental difference that affects the winning, especially the humidity that greatly affects the rolling speed of the game ball (strictly speaking, the moisture adhering to the game ball). Specifically, focusing on the tribology phenomenon that the coefficient of friction tends to decrease as the humidity rises, a drying means for removing water adhering to the game ball is provided, and the rolling speed of the game ball is made uniform. We propose a game machine that is not affected by changes in the environment, that is, a game machine that can approximate the game performance (winning rate, etc.) to the original design values and data, and can maintain the approximated state.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a blower drying device 600 as a drying means for removing the moisture adhering to the gaming ball is arranged in the upper plate unit 210.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1, a plate unit 210 having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.
The upper plate unit 210 further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decorative device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 29 is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit 210 so that the player can easily operate the effect button 25.
The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit 210. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a discharge button 28, and a balance display unit (not shown). The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the ejection button 28 is when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.
The decoration device houses a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit 210. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the upper plate unit 210 and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a lower part capable of storing game balls. A lower plate unit 230 having a plate 23 is provided.
The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30.
The lower plate unit 230 is arranged below the upper plate unit 210 at a predetermined interval from the upper plate unit 210. The lower plate 23 has a ball punching hole that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower dish 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit for opening and closing the ball pulling hole. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit to open the ball removal hole, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removal hole.

FIG. 51 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement location of the blower drying device 600. Further, FIG. 52A is a diagram illustrating an example of the blower drying device 600, and is a schematic cross-sectional view of the upper plate unit 210 and the lower plate 23. In FIG. 52 (a), the effect operation device, the ball lending operation device, and the decoration device are not shown.
As shown in FIG. 51, for example, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a blower drying device 600 for drying the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23. The blower drying device 600 is built in the upper plate unit 210. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the blower unit 610 such as a fan and the upper plate side dehumidifying unit arranged above the blower unit 610. It is configured to include a 620A and a lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B disposed below the blower portion 610.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52A, the upper plate 21 of the housing of the upper plate unit 210 is provided with a plurality of upper holes 211 which are circular holes communicating the inside and the outside of the upper plate unit 210. Has been done. The shape and size of the upper hole 211 is arbitrary as long as it is a shape and size in which the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through, but the shape and size do not obstruct the flow of the game ball from the upper plate 21 to the ball launcher. Is preferable. Specifically, for example, when the upper hole 211 is a circular hole portion as in the present embodiment, the diameter of the upper hole 211 is preferably ½ or less of the diameter of the game ball, and is the diameter of the game ball. It is more preferably 1/5 or less, and further preferably 1/10 or less of the diameter of the game ball.
Further, in the portion of the housing of the upper plate unit 210 facing the lower plate 23, a plurality of lower holes 212 which are circular holes communicating the inside and the outside of the upper plate unit 210 are provided. The shape and size of the prepared hole 212 are arbitrary, but it is preferable that the shape and size are such that the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through.

The blower portion 610 is arranged inside the upper plate unit 210 with the air outlet 611 facing upward and the suction port 612 facing downward. Therefore, the lower hole 212 of the upper plate unit 210 functions as an intake port, and the upper hole 211 of the upper plate unit 210 functions as an exhaust port. That is, by operating the blower unit 610, the air outside the upper plate unit 210 is forcibly sucked into the upper plate unit 210 through the prepared hole 212, and the upper plate unit 210 is forcibly sucked into the upper plate unit 210 through the upper hole 211. The air inside is forcibly discharged to the outside of the precision plate unit 210. In this way, the blower drying device 600 can forcibly ventilate the inside of the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23, so that the humidity in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 can be lowered, and by extension, the upper plate 21 can be lowered. It is possible to promote the evaporation of water adhering to the game ball inside or in the lower plate 23. Further, since air can be blown to the game ball stored in the upper plate 21, the water adhering to the game ball in the upper plate 21 can be forcibly removed.

The game control device 100 of the present embodiment is configured to control ON / OFF of the blower unit 610 according to the current game state and the like. The device for controlling the ON / OFF of the blower unit 610 is not limited to the game control device 100 and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 control the ON / OFF of the blower unit 610. May be.

As shown in FIG. 52A, for example, the dehumidifying section 620A on the upper plate side includes a dehumidifying sheet 621 and a resin case 622 for accommodating the dehumidifying sheet 621. Similarly, the lower plate side dehumidifying section 620B is also configured to include a dehumidifying sheet 621 and a resin case 622 for accommodating the dehumidifying sheet 621.
The dehumidifying sheet 621 is a sheet member having hygroscopicity (water absorption) and breathability, and is, for example, a breathable filter containing a hygroscopic component. Further, a plurality of through holes 622a are provided on the upper surface portion (top surface portion) and the lower surface portion (bottom surface portion) of the resin case 622, respectively. Therefore, in the blower drying device 600, even when the blower unit 610 is not operating, the humidity inside the upper plate 21 can be mainly kept low by the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A, and the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B mainly keeps the humidity low. In addition, the humidity inside the lower plate 23 can be kept low. Further, by operating the blower unit 610, the moisture removing effect (dehumidifying effect) of the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B can be enhanced.

Specifically, by operating the blower portion 610, the air outside the resin case 622 is forcibly sucked into the inside of the resin case 622 through the through hole 622a provided in the lower surface portion of the resin case 622, and the air is forcibly sucked into the inside of the resin case 622. After passing through the dehumidifying sheet 621, the sucked air is forcibly discharged to the outside of the resin case 622 through the through hole 622a provided in the upper surface portion of the resin case 622. That is, the blower drying device 600 sucks in air (for example, moist air) by operating the blower unit 610, and converts the air into dry air by the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B. It can be converted and then blown out. As described above, since the blower drying device 600 can ventilate the inside of the upper plate 21 and the inside of the lower plate 23 with dry air, the humidity in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 can be efficiently lowered. Further, since the dry air can be blown to the game balls stored in the upper plate 21, the moisture adhering to the game balls in the upper plate 21 can be efficiently removed.

FIG. 52B is a diagram illustrating an example of the blower drying device 600, and is a schematic cross-sectional view of the resin case 622.
The upper plate side dehumidifying portion 620A and the lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B are detachably arranged in the upper plate unit 210. Therefore, the entire upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A can be replaced, or the entire lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B can be replaced.
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, only the dehumidifying sheet 621 can be replaced in the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the resin case 622 is composed of a case body 623 having an open upper surface and a lid 624 that closes the upper surface opening of the case body 623. A pair of guide grooves 623a is formed at the upper end of the case body 623, and the lid body 624 can be attached to and detached from the case body 623 by sliding along the guide grooves 623a. Therefore, by taking out the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A and the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B from the upper plate unit 210 and opening and closing the lid 624, only the dehumidifying sheet 621 can be replaced.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), two dehumidifying sheets 621 are used for the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A, whereas the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B is used. Uses one dehumidifying sheet 621. Therefore, the maximum water absorption amount (saturated water absorption amount) of the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A is twice the maximum water absorption amount (saturated water absorption amount) of the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B.
Since the game ball to be launched soon is stored in the upper plate 21, in order to realize a stable winning rate at all times, it is better to remove the water adhering to the game ball in the lower plate 23. It is preferable to give priority to the removal of the water adhering to the game ball in the upper plate 21. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum water absorption amount of the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A is made larger than the maximum water absorption amount of the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B to ensure the moisture adhering to the game ball in the upper plate 21. The removal can be continued for a long period of time.

In the present embodiment, the maximum water absorption amount of the dehumidifying section is adjusted by the number of dehumidifying sheets 621, but the method of adjusting the maximum water absorption amount of the dehumidifying section is not limited to this. For example, the number of dehumidifying sheets is the same for the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B, the first dehumidifying sheet is used for the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B, and the first dehumidifying section is used for the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A. A second dehumidifying sheet having a larger maximum water absorption than the sheet (for example, a second dehumidifying sheet having a higher content of a moisture absorbing component than the first dehumidifying sheet) may be used.
Further, from the viewpoint of reliably and quickly removing the water adhering to the game ball in the upper plate 21, the moisture absorption efficiency of the upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A is higher than that of the lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B. It may be configured to be high. For example, the number of dehumidifying sheets is the same for the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B, the first dehumidifying sheet is used for the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B, and the first dehumidifying section is used for the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A. A second dehumidifying sheet having a higher moisture absorption efficiency than the sheet (for example, a second dehumidifying sheet made of a material having a higher moisture absorbing efficiency than the first dehumidifying sheet, a second dehumidifying sheet having a higher content of components having a higher moisture absorbing efficiency than the first dehumidifying sheet). A dehumidifying sheet) may be used.
Further, the blower drying device 600 may be provided not in the precision dish unit 210 but in the back flow path of the gaming machine 10 (see the first modification (described later) of the second embodiment).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the upper plate 21 for storing the game balls to be launched into the game area 32, the blowing means (blower unit) capable of blowing air to the upper plate 21. It has 610), and the upper plate 21 is provided with a plurality of air outlets (upper holes 211) through which the game ball cannot pass, so that the air from the air blower means is sent to the outside through the air outlet.
Therefore, the inside of the upper plate 21 can be forcibly ventilated to lower the humidity in the upper plate 21, and air is blown to the game ball in the upper plate 21 to forcibly remove the moisture adhering to the game ball. Since it can be removed to the surface, the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
Further, since the wind is sent from the upper plate 21, the front of the gaming machine 10 can be ventilated. That is, since the space between the gaming machine 10 and the player can be ventilated, the player can play comfortably.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper plate 21 is provided, and the upper plate unit 210 including the blowing means (blower unit 610) is provided, and the dehumidifying means (upper plate side) is provided inside the upper plate unit 210. The dehumidifying section 620A, the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B) can be arranged so that the air from the blowing means is sent to the outside through the blowing port (upper hole 211) after passing through the dehumidifying means. ..
With this configuration, the inside of the upper plate 21 can be ventilated by dry air, so that the humidity inside the upper plate 21 can be efficiently lowered. Further, since the dry air can be blown to the game balls stored in the upper plate 21, the moisture adhering to the game balls in the upper plate 21 can be efficiently removed.

As shown in FIG. 53A (a), for example, the prepared hole 212 may be provided in a portion of the housing of the upper plate unit 210 that does not face the lower plate 23.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53A (b), the blower drying device 600 may include only one of the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B. Further, the blower drying device 600 may include only one of the blower means and the dehumidifying means.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 53B (a), the upper hole 211 is the entrance of the ball guide path 79a (upper plate 21 of the ball guide path 79a) for guiding the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the ball launching device. It may be provided in the vicinity of the side end). In that case, since the wind can be locally blown to the part of the inside of the upper plate 21 near the ball launching device, from the time when the water adhering to the game ball is removed until the game ball is launched. The period of can be shortened. By shortening the period from removing the water adhering to the game ball to launching the game ball, the possibility of water reattaching to the game ball is reduced, so the winning rate as designed. Will be realized more stably.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper hole 211 is provided on the bottom surface portion of the upper plate 21 so as to be orthogonal to the bottom surface portion, but the penetrating direction of the upper hole 211 is a direction orthogonal to the bottom surface portion. It is not limited to the above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be oblique to the bottom surface portion.
Further, the upper hole 211 may be provided on the side surface portion of the upper plate 21 in addition to (or instead of) the bottom surface portion of the upper plate 21 instead of the bottom surface portion of the upper plate 21. When the upper hole 211 is provided on the side surface portion of the upper plate 21, the penetrating direction of the upper hole 211 may be a direction orthogonal to the side surface portion or an oblique direction with respect to the side surface portion. good.

Further, the distance between the upper holes 211 (the distance from the center of one upper hole 211 to the center of the upper hole 211 adjacent to the one upper hole 211) is preferably less than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, even if the upper hole 211 of the one is blocked by the game ball (that is, even if the game ball rides on the upper hole 211 of the one), the upper hole 211 adjacent to the upper hole 211 of the one is a game ball. Since it is not blocked by, the inside of the upper plate 21 can be effectively dehumidified.
Further, the diameter of one end (outer end) and the other end (inner end) of the upper hole 211 do not have to be the same. When the diameter of one end of the upper hole 211 and the diameter of the other end are different, the above-mentioned "shape and size of the upper hole 211" is the end on the side where the game ball can be contacted, that is, one end of the upper hole 211. Refers to the shape and size of (outer end). Similarly, the diameter of one end (outer end) and the other end (inner end) of the prepared hole 212 do not have to be the same.
Further, the shapes of the upper hole 211 and the lower hole 212 are not limited to the circular shape and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the shape of the upper hole 211 may be tapered in the flow direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. 53B (b) and 53B (c), or may be tapered in the flow direction of the game ball, for example, as shown in FIG. 53B (d). , The shape may be long in the flow direction of the game ball. When the shape of the upper hole 211 is as shown in FIGS. 53B (b) to 53B, the upper hole 211 not only does not obstruct the flow of the game ball but also allows the game ball to smoothly flow to the ball launcher. It is possible to guide by.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A, lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B) can be configured to include at least a dehumidifying sheet 621.
With such a configuration, the ease of handling of the dehumidifying means is improved.
The configurations of the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B can be appropriately changed. For example, the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B include, for example, a dehumidifying sheet 621, that is, a granular hygroscopic agent such as silica gel in place of (or in addition to) a sheet-shaped hygroscopic agent. May be. Further, the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B can be configured to include a deodorant in addition to the dehumidifying agent such as the dehumidifying sheet 621, for example. With this configuration, the odor in the amusement store (smell of cigarettes, etc.) can also be removed. Further, the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A and the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B do not have to be provided with the resin case 622, and may be made of only a hygroscopic agent (dehumidifying sheet 621 or the like), for example.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A, lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B) is configured to be detachably arranged inside the upper plate unit 210. Can be done.
With this configuration, the entire dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A, lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B) can be replaced, or only the dehumidifying agent (dehumidifying sheet 621, etc.) of the dehumidifying means can be replaced. can.

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper plate unit 210 having the upper plate 21 for storing the game ball to be launched into the game area 32 and the lower plate 23 arranged below the upper plate unit 210. In the gaming machine provided with, an upper hole 211 is provided inside the upper plate unit 210, and the upper plate 21 is a hole for communicating the inside and the outside of the upper plate unit 210. In the portion of the upper plate unit 210 facing the lower plate 23, a plurality of lower holes 212, which are holes for communicating the inside and the outside of the upper plate unit 210, are provided, and the suction port 612 and the air outlet of the air blowing means are provided. One of 611 faces the upper hole 211 side, and the other of the suction port 612 and the outlet 611 faces the lower hole 212 side.
Therefore, it is possible to forcibly ventilate the inside of the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23 to reduce the humidity in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 23, and at the same time, air in the game ball in the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23. Can be sprayed to forcibly remove the water adhering to the game ball, so that the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
Further, since the wind is sent from the precision plate unit 210, it is possible to ventilate the front of the gaming machine 10. That is, since the space between the gaming machine 10 and the player can be ventilated, the player can play comfortably.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the outlet 611 can be configured to face the upper hole 211 side, and the suction port 612 can be configured to face the lower hole 212 side.
With this configuration, air is blown onto the game ball stored in the upper plate 21, that is, the game ball that is to be launched soon into the game area 32, and the moisture adhering to the game ball is forcibly discharged. Can be removed. Further, since the suction port 612 faces downward, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of sucking in dust and dirt.
It is also possible to configure the outlet 611 to face the prepared hole 212 side and the suction port 612 to face the upper hole 211 side. That is, the upper hole 211 of the upper plate unit 210 may function as an intake port, and the lower hole 212 of the upper plate unit 210 may function as an exhaust port.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the upper plate side dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A) is located inside the upper plate unit 210 between the blowing means (blower unit 610) and the upper hole 211. ), And inside the upper plate unit 210, the lower plate side dehumidifying means (lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B) is arranged between the blower means and the prepared hole 212, and the upper plate side dehumidifying means. Can be configured to have a larger maximum water absorption (saturated water absorption) than the lower dish side dehumidifying means.
With such a configuration, the reliable removal of the water adhering to the game ball stored in the upper plate 21, that is, the game ball that will be launched soon to the game area 32 is continued for a long period of time. be able to.

The maximum water absorption of the upper plate side dehumidifying means (upper plate side dehumidifying unit 620A) may be the same as the maximum water absorption amount of the lower plate side dehumidifying means (lower plate side dehumidifying unit 620B), or the lower plate side. It may be less than the maximum water absorption of the dehumidifying means (lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B).
Further, the through hole 622a of the dehumidifying portion 620A on the upper plate side may be provided so as to face the upper hole 211 of the upper plate unit 210 (that is, the through hole 622a is arranged directly below the upper hole 211). In that case, since the air from the through hole 622a directly enters the upper hole 211 directly above the through hole 622a, the dehumidification in the upper plate 21 can be performed more effectively.
Further, the through hole 622a of the lower plate side dehumidifying portion 620B may be provided so as to face the lower hole 212 of the upper plate unit 210 (that is, the through hole 622a is arranged directly above the lower plate 212). In that case, since the air from the prepared hole 212 directly enters the through hole 622a directly above the prepared hole 212, the dehumidification in the lower plate 23 can be performed more effectively.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a heating / drying device 700 as a drying means for removing moisture adhering to the gaming ball is arranged on the rear surface (back surface) side of the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 54 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, and is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement location of the heating / drying device 700.
For example, as shown in FIG. 54, on the upper part of the back surface of the front frame 12, an external information terminal that outputs information to the outside (for example, a symbol confirmation signal, a big hit signal, a probability fluctuation signal, a prize ball signal, a ball rental signal, etc.) is output. A plate 71 and a storage tank 72 for storing game balls before payout are provided.
Further, a chute 73 having a gentle slope and guiding the gaming ball toward one side of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the bottom of the storage tank 72. A bending flow path device 74 that converts the flow direction of the game ball from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction is connected to the end of the chute 73.
A ball payout device (payout unit) 75 having a drive source is arranged at the lower end of the bending flow path device 74, and the ball payout device 75 is configured to be able to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. An upstream portion forming member 76 forming an upstream portion of the upper plate guiding flow path for guiding the game ball discharged by the ball dispensing device 75 to the upper plate 21 is connected to the outlet of the ball dispensing device 75. In this modification, the heating / drying device 700 is attached to the upstream portion forming member 76. That is, in the back flow path arranged on the rear surface side of the game machine 10, the upstream back flow path (reservoir tank 72, chute 73, and bending flow path device) through which the game ball before being paid out by the ball payout device 75 passes. There are a flow path formed by 74 and a downstream back flow path (a flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the game ball after being dispensed by the ball payout device 75 passes, and this modification is made. In the example, the heating / drying device 700 is arranged in the downstream back flow path.
Further, the downstream portion of the bending flow path device 74, the ball payout device 75, the upstream portion forming member 76, and the heating / drying device 700 are covered from behind with a protective cover 77.

Further, in the center of the back surface of the front frame 12, there is an effect control device 300 that controls the effect of the variable display game on the display device 41 (image display device), and a game control that collectively controls various devices such as the effect control device 300. The device 100 and the like are arranged.
Further, in the lower part of the back surface of the front frame 12, a payout control device 200 for controlling the ball payout device 75, a card unit relay board 78 for relaying signals exchanged between the game machine 10 side and the card unit side, and a game control. A power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices such as the device 100, and the like are provided.

FIG. 55A is a diagram illustrating an example of the heating / drying device 700.
As shown in FIG. 54, for example, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is a heating / drying device 700 for drying a gaming ball passing through the upstream portion forming member 76 (that is, the upstream portion of the upper plate guide flow path). It is equipped with. The heating / drying device 700 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear surface portion (rear surface portion) of the upstream portion forming member 76, and as shown in FIG. 55 (a), for example, the temperatures of the heating portion 710 such as a heater and the heating portion 710. The temperature adjusting unit 720 for adjusting the temperature, the heat conductive metal plate 730 disposed between the heating part 710 and the upstream portion forming member 76, and the portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 facing the heat conductive metal plate 730. It is configured to include a back flow path wall 740 disposed in.

The temperature adjusting unit 720 is, for example, a temperature overheating prevention device that prevents the temperature overheating of the heating unit 710. Specifically, the temperature adjusting unit 720 measures the temperature of the heating unit 710 by, for example, a temperature measuring means, and switches the heating unit 710 to the normal power mode when the temperature of the heating unit 710 falls below a predetermined temperature range. Control is performed to switch the heating unit 710 to a low power mode with lower power consumption than the normal power mode (or an off mode in which power is not supplied) when the temperature of the heating unit 710 exceeds a predetermined temperature range. It is configured to perform control to switch to.

The temperature adjusting method of the heating unit 710 by the temperature adjusting unit 720 can be appropriately changed. The temperature adjusting unit 720 measures, for example, the time after the heating unit 710 is switched to the low power mode (or the off mode) by the time measuring means (timer) and the time after the heating unit 710 is switched to the normal power mode, and the heating unit 710 is used. Controls to switch the heating unit 710 to the normal power mode when the time after switching to the low power mode (or off mode) reaches a predetermined first time, and after the heating unit 710 switches to the normal power mode. It may be configured to control the heating unit 710 to switch to the low power mode (or the off mode) when the time reaches a predetermined second time.

Further, the temperature adjusting unit 720 may be configured to control switching the mode of the heating unit 710 in response to, for example, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout). Further, the temperature adjusting unit 720 may be configured to control the mode of the heating unit 710 to be switched according to, for example, a gaming state (for example, a gaming state in which the payout of the game ball is large and a gaming state in which the game ball is not paid out). Further, for example, a switch for detecting that the ball pulling lever (lever operated when pulling the game ball from the back flow path) provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 is operated is provided, and the temperature adjusting unit 720 is provided. May be configured to control the mode of the heating unit 710 to be switched according to the signal from the switch.

Further, the game control device 100 of this modification is configured to control ON / OFF of the heating unit 710 according to the payout operation of the ball payout device 75. Specifically, for example, a control that turns on the heating unit 710 when the payout operation of the ball payout device 75 starts, and turns off the heating unit 710 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the payout operation of the ball payout device 75. I do. The device for controlling the ON / OFF of the heating unit 710 is not limited to the game control device 100 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300 control the ON / OFF of the heating unit 710. May be.

The heat conductive metal plate 730 is an aluminum plate, an iron plate, or the like, and heat from the heating portion 710 is substantially uniformly applied to a predetermined portion (a portion where the back flow path wall 740 is provided) of the upstream portion forming member 76. In addition to heat transfer, it is provided to efficiently transfer heat to the target portion (the portion where the back flow path wall 740 is provided) of the upstream portion forming member 76.
When the heat conductive metal plate 730 is not arranged between the heating portion 710 and the upstream portion forming member 76, a specific portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 (for example, a portion facing the heating element of the heating portion 710). May be hotter than other parts. Therefore, in this modification, in order to prevent the upstream portion forming member 76 from being partially heated, the heat from the heating portion 710 is equalized by the heat conductive metal plate 730, and then the upstream portion forming member 76 is used. I try to give it to.
Further, since the heating / drying device 700 includes the heat conductive metal plate 730, the degree of freedom in selecting the heating unit 710 is high. That is, even if the shape and size of the heating portion 710 do not match the upstream portion forming member 76, if the shape and size of the heat conductive metal plate 730 match the upstream portion forming member 76, the heat conductive metal plate is concerned. By 730, the heat from the heating portion 710 can be transferred to the upstream portion forming member 76 substantially uniformly and efficiently.

The back flow path wall 740 is a plate-shaped member provided with a plurality of through holes (heat dissipation ports), and is made of a thermosetting resin so as not to be deformed or damaged by heat from the heating portion 710. The shape and size of the through hole (heat dissipation port) provided in the rear flow path wall 740 is arbitrary as long as it is a shape and size in which the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through, but in the upstream portion forming member 76. It is preferable that the shape and size do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. Specifically, for example, when the through hole (radiation port) is a circular hole, the diameter of the through hole (radiation port) is preferably 1/2 or less of the diameter of the game ball, and the diameter of the game ball. 1/5 or less of the above is more preferable.

In this modification, a through hole (heat dissipation port) is provided in the back flow path wall 740 so as to be orthogonal to the back flow path wall 740, but the through hole is provided in the back flow path. The direction is not limited to the direction orthogonal to the wall 740 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the direction may be diagonal to the back flow path wall 740.
Further, in this modification, only the portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 facing the heat conductive metal plate 730 (that is, only the back flow path wall 740) is formed of the thermosetting resin, and the other of the upstream portion forming member 76 is formed. The portion of is formed of a thermoplastic resin, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire upstream portion forming member 76 is formed of a thermosetting resin, and a through hole (heat dissipation port) is provided in a portion facing the heat conductive metal plate 730. You may provide more than one.

Further, the heating / drying device 700 may include a plurality of heating units 710, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b). Since the heat-drying device 700 includes the heat-conducting metal plate 730, the heat from the plurality of heating parts 710 can be homogenized by the heat-conducting metal plate 730 and then applied to the upstream portion forming member 76. When a plurality of heating units 710 are provided, a temperature adjusting unit 720 may be provided for each of the plurality of heating units 710 as shown in FIG. 55 (b), or the plurality of heating units 710 can be collectively controlled. A temperature adjusting unit 720 may be provided.
Further, the shape of the heat conductive metal plate 730 may be a shape that covers not only the rear surface portion of the upstream portion forming member 76 but also the side surface portion of the upstream portion forming member 76.

Further, the heating / drying device 700 is not a downstream back flow path (a flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the game ball after being dispensed by the ball payout device 75 passes, for example, the ball payout device 75. It may be provided in the upstream back flow path (the flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74) through which the game ball before being discharged is passed. Specifically, the heating / drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the storage tank 72, or the heating / drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the chute 73, for example, as shown in FIG. 56. The heating / drying device 700 may be mounted on the outer surface of the device 74. Alternatively, the heating / drying device 700 may be mounted from the storage tank 72 to the chute 73, the heating / drying device 700 may be mounted from the chute 73 to the bending flow path device 74, or the heating / drying device 700 may be mounted from the storage tank 72. The heating / drying device 700 may be mounted over the bending flow path device 74 via the chute 73.

As described above, according to the game machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, in the game machine provided with the ball payout device 75 on the back side, which pays out the game balls based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the game machine 10 A heating means (heating unit 710) that heats the back flow path that guides the game ball on the back side, and a heat transfer means (heat conductive metal plate 730) that transfers heat from the heating means to the back flow path. It also has a heat dissipation port (through hole) through which the game ball cannot pass, and also has a back flow path wall 740 that forms a part of the back flow path.
Therefore, since the water adhering to the game ball passing through the back flow path can be forcibly removed by heat, the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
The heat conductive metal plate 730 may be in contact with the motor of the ball payout device 75. In that case, not only the heat generated by the heating unit 710 but also the heat generated by the motor can be transferred to the back flow path, so that the back flow path can be heated at a higher speed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the back flow path heated by the heating means (heating unit 710) is a flow path (downstream back surface) through which the game balls discharged from the ball payout device 75 pass. It is a flow path (that is, a flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) (see FIG. 54), and the heating means can be configured to be turned ON / OFF according to the payout operation of the ball payout device 75.
With such a configuration, it is possible to forcibly remove the water adhering to the game ball after being discharged by the ball dispensing device 75 by heat. Further, since the heating means (heating unit 710) is turned on / off according to the payout operation of the ball payout device 75, wasteful power consumption can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the first modification of the second embodiment, the back flow path heated by the heating means (heating unit 710) is a flow path (upstream back flow path) that guides the game ball to the ball payout device 75. That is, it can be configured to be a flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74 (see FIG. 56).
With such a configuration, it is possible to forcibly remove the water adhering to the game ball before being discharged by the ball dispensing device 75 by heat.

In the gaming machine 10 of each embodiment and each modification, the special variable winning device 38 replaces the attacker type opening / closing door 38c and slides in the front-rear direction as shown in FIG. 57, for example, to win a large prize. It may be provided with an opening / closing door (sliding door) 38c that opens / closes the mouth 38d. Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 57, for example, the special variable winning device 38 is an effect switch (upstream switch 381 and downstream switch) for measuring the time when the game ball flows down on the opening / closing door (sliding door) 38c. It may be provided with 382).
As mentioned above, the usage environment of the gaming machine (temperature, humidity, etc., especially humidity) has a great influence on the rolling speed of the gaming ball, so the time for the gaming ball to flow down on the shelf (opening / closing door 38c) is measured. By doing so, the usage environment of the game ball can be inferred.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the opening / closing door 38c is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the upstream switch 381 and then after that. It flows into the large winning opening 38d, is detected by the large winning opening switch 38a, and is discharged from the game area 32.
On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 57B, when the opening / closing door 38c is in the closed state, the game ball that has entered the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the upstream switch 381 and then the opening / closing door 38c. It flows down (rolls) and is detected by the downstream switch 382, and returns to the game area 32.
The upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 are connected to the effect control device 300. Although not shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a front cover, and the front surface of the front cover is close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15. It is designed so that the game ball does not flow down in front of this front.

The effect control device 300 calculates, for example, the time from when one game ball passes through the upstream switch 381 to when it passes through the downstream switch 382, based on the detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382. The calculated time is compared with the preset reference value to determine the corresponding level value. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the difference between the calculated time (measured value) and the reference value is -5% or more and less than + 5% (that is, within the reference range), the level value. Judged as "3".

Further, the effect control device 300 displays a level value notification image for notifying the determined level value, that is, a level value notification image in a display mode corresponding to the determined level value, on the display device 41 every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations. indicate. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the level value is "3", a yellow level value notification image (for example, an image in which the petals imitate a yellow flower) is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (c). indicate. The level value notification image is not limited to an image imitating a flower and can be appropriately changed. For example, a meter image displaying a level value on a meter may be used.

By checking the level value notification image, the player estimates whether the winning rate is according to the design value, is in a state more advantageous than the design value, or is in a state disadvantageous than the design value. Can be done.
In addition, the clerk of the gaming store can maintain the original performance of the gaming machine by checking the level value notification image and taking measures such as adjusting the air conditioning in the store if the measured value is not within the standard range. It becomes.

The reference value may be constant throughout the year, or may be changed depending on the season by using RTC338.
Further, a plurality of level value notification images may be displayed to display the transition of the level value. In this case, it is preferable to add the level value notification image every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations, and sequentially delete the old level value notification image.
Further, the effect control device 300 determines that an error occurs when the previous level value and the current level value change by a predetermined step (for example, two steps) or more, invalidates the current level value, and notifies the error. You may go.
Further, instead of (or in addition to) the level value notification image, the usage environment (temperature, humidity, etc.) of the gaming machine estimated based on the calculated time (measured value) may be notified.

Further, the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 may be connected to the game control device 100.
In this case, the game control device 100 may determine the level value based on the detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382 and notify the effect control device 300. The timing at which the game control device 100 informs the effect control device 300 of the level value can be appropriately selected. For example, the level value may be notified every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations, or a change in the level value occurs. The level value may be notified at the time when it is done.
Further, in this case, the game control device 100 may determine the level value based on the detection signals from the upstream switch 381 and the downstream switch 382, and notify the external device via the external information terminal board 71. The timing at which the game control device 100 notifies the external device of the level value via the external information terminal board 71 can be appropriately selected. For example, the level value may be notified every predetermined time or every predetermined number of determinations. The level value may be notified when the level value changes. By notifying the external device of the level value, for example, the external device can be configured to aggregate the level values and automatically control the in-store air conditioning to maintain the original performance of the gaming machine.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a blower effect drying device 800 as a drying means for removing the moisture adhering to the gaming ball is arranged in the lower plate unit 230. The blast effect drying device 800 functions as a blast drying device that removes moisture adhering to the game ball by the wind, and also functions as a blast effect device that sends a recognizable wind to the player. do.

FIG. 58 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, and is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement location of the blower effect drying device 800. Further, FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the blower effect drying device 800.
As shown in FIG. 58, for example, the blower effect drying device 800 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 23 in the lower plate unit 230. That is, the blower effect drying device 800 is provided on the left side of the operation handle 24 and the lower speaker 19b on the right side.
As shown in FIG. 59 (a), for example, the blower effect drying device 800 includes a blower unit 810 such as a fan, a first air passage 820 that guides the air from the blower unit 810 to the ball launcher 79 side, and a first air passage unit 820. 1 The first opening / closing member 821 that opens and closes the air passage 820, the perforated wall portion 822 that blocks the movement of the game ball but does not block the movement of the wind (air), and the operation handle 24 and the right side of the operation handle 24 that controls the wind from the blower portion 810. It is configured to include a second air passage 830 that guides the lower speaker 19b to the side, and a second opening / closing member 831 that opens / closes the second air passage 830.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the ball guide path 79a that guides the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 to the ball launcher 79 is provided with a communication opening that communicates with the first air passage 820. There is. The communication opening is the outlet of the first air passage 820. That is, the communication opening is connected to the air outlet 811 of the air blowing unit 810 by the first air passage 820. Since the communication opening is covered with a perforated wall portion 822 provided with a plurality of through holes, the wind passing through the first air passage 820 can enter the ball guide path 79a, but the ball guide path 79a The game ball passing through the first air passage 820 cannot enter the first air passage 820.
The first opening / closing member 821 opens the first air passage 820, that is, opens the open state (state shown in FIG. 59 (a)) that allows the flow of wind to the ball guide path 79a, and closes the first air passage 820. That is, it can be converted into a closed state (state shown in FIG. 59 (b)) in which the flow of wind to the ball guide path 79a is prohibited.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, an air outlet 830a, which is a communication hole for communicating the inside (second air passage 830) and the outside of the gaming machine 10, is provided in the vicinity of the operation handle 24 and the lower speaker 19b on the right side. There is. That is, the air outlet 830a is the outlet of the second air passage 830. Therefore, since the wind that has passed through the second air passage 830 is discharged to the outside of the game machine 10 through the air outlet 830a, the player can feel the wind.
The second opening / closing member 831 opens the second air passage 830, that is, the open state that allows the flow of air to the air outlet 830a (the state shown in FIG. 59 (b)), and closes the second air passage 830, that is. It can be converted into a closed state (state shown in FIG. 59 (a)) in which the flow of wind to the air outlet 830a is prohibited.

The effect control device 300 of this modification is configured to control the state of the blower effect drying device 800, specifically, the opening / closing operation of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831.
The default state of the blower effect drying device 800 is a state in which the blower drying device functions as a blower drying device (that is, the first opening / closing member 821 is in the open state and the second opening / closing member 831 is in the closed state. FIG. 59A). State). For example, during the execution of a specific effect, the effect control device 300 changes the blast effect drying device 800 from the blast dry state to the blast effect state (that is, the first opening / closing member 821 is closed and the second opening / closing member 831 is open. The state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 59 (b)), and control is performed to return to the blast dry state at a predetermined timing. Here, the specific effect is, for example, an effect having a high expectation of big hit (expected value from which a special result mode is derived), and specifically, for example, a special 3 reach or a premier reach.

Alternatively, for example, when the effect control device 300 performs a lottery for the blower effect (that is, a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the blower effect) at the start of the special figure variation display game, and wins the lottery. The blower effect drying device 800 may be switched from the blower dry state to the blower effect drying state during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and may be configured to perform control to return to the blower dry state at a predetermined timing. For example, by setting the winning probability in the case of a big hit to be higher than the winning probability in the case where the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is out of order, the ventilation effect is executed as an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. can do.

Further, the effect control device 300 of this modification is configured to control ON / OFF of the blower unit 810 according to the current gaming state and the like. The device for controlling the ON / OFF of the blower unit 810 is not limited to the effect control device 300 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the game control device 100 may control the ON / OFF of the blower unit 810.

In this way, the effect control device 300 switches between the blower dry state and the blower effect state by opening either one of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 and closing one of them. Can be done.
Therefore, at least in the air-dried state, the moisture adhering to the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a can be forcibly removed by the wind. Further, it is also possible to perform a blowing effect in which the wind from the blowing unit 810 that generates the wind for removing the moisture adhering to the game ball is sent toward the hand operating the operation handle 24 of the player.
Further, when the state is switched to the ventilation effect state, the ball guide path 79a side is closed by the first opening / closing member 821, so that it is possible to prevent external moisture from entering the inside of the ball guide path 79a. Further, when the state is switched to the blower effect state, the air from the blower portion 810 goes toward the blower port 830a, so that the moisture accumulated in the second blower path 830 can be discharged from the blower port 830a to the outside of the gaming machine 10. At the same time, since the wind that hits the first opening / closing member 821 heads toward the air outlet 830a, the moisture that has accumulated in the upstream portion of the first air passage 820 (the portion between the first opening / closing member 821 and the air blower portion 810) is blown. It is also possible to discharge from the mouth 830a to the outside of the gaming machine 10. Further, when the state is switched to the blower effect state, the wind is blown out from the blower port 830a, so that it is possible to prevent external moisture from entering the inside of the gaming machine 10 from the blower port 830a.
Further, when the state is switched to the air blowing dry state, the air blowing port 830a side is closed by the second opening / closing member 831, so that it is possible to prevent the moisture outside the gaming machine 10 from entering the inside of the ball guide path 79a.

The closed state of the first opening / closing member 821 is not a state in which the second air passage 830 is completely closed, that is, a state in which the flow of air to the air outlet 830a is prohibited, but the flow of air to the air port 830a is restricted. It is good if it is in a state of doing. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the closed state of the first opening / closing member 821 allows the flow of air to the air outlet 830a, but the distribution amount is reduced compared to the open state. It may be configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the moisture adhering to the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a not only in the blower dry state but also in the blower effect effect state.
Further, the opening / closing member may be only the second opening / closing member 831. That is, the first opening / closing member 821 may not be provided. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to remove the moisture adhering to the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a in both the blower dry state and the blower effect effect state.

Further, the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 are not provided, and the blower portion 810 is set to the first state facing the first air passage 820 side and the second state facing the second air passage 830 side. It may be configured to be convertible.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the air blower dry state, the air blower unit 810 is in the first state in which the air outlet 811 faces the first air passage 820 side. Then, when shifting from the blower dry state to the blower effect state, the blower portion 810 is rotated around the rotation shaft 810a, and the outlet 811 is the second blower, for example, as shown in FIG. 61B. It may be configured to convert to the second state facing the road 830 side.

Further, an operation switch that can be operated by the player is provided at a predetermined position on the front surface side of the gaming machine 10 (for example, in the vicinity of the air outlet 830a), and when the operation switch is pressed in the air blowing dry state, the air blowing effect is produced for a predetermined period. It may be configured to transition to a state.
Further, as shown in FIG. 62, for example, the first air passage 820 may have a shape that passes through the ball launcher 79 or its vicinity. As a result, the wind passing through the first air passage 820 can be heated by the heat generated inside the ball launching device 79 (exhaust heat from the ball launching device 79), so that the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a can be heated. Hot air (or warm air) can be blown to the ball launcher 79, and the moisture adhering to the game ball supplied to the ball launcher 79 can be efficiently removed.
Further, in the blower effect drying device 800, instead of the porous wall portion 822, the upper dish side dehumidifying section 620A (see FIG. 52 (a)) or the lower dish side dehumidifying section 620B (see FIG. 52 (a)) first blows air. It may cover the exit of the road 820. As a result, it becomes possible to blow dry air onto the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a, and it is possible to efficiently remove the moisture adhering to the game ball supplied to the ball launcher 79.

The blower effect drying device 800 may be provided not in the lower plate unit 230 but in the back flow path of the gaming machine 10, for example, as shown in FIG. 63. That is, the blower effect drying device 800 is an upstream back flow path (a flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74) through which the game ball before being discharged by the ball payout device 75 passes. Functions as a blower drying device that removes moisture adhering to the game ball passing through the downstream back flow path (flow path formed by the upstream portion forming member 76) through which the game ball after being discharged by the ball payout device 75 passes. And, it is also possible to have a function as a blower effect device for sending wind toward the player from the blower port 830a provided in the vicinity of the speakers 19a and 19b. In the example shown in FIG. 63, the blower port 830a is provided in the vicinity of the upper speaker 19a on the left side, but the blower port 830a is in the vicinity of the upper speaker 19a on the right side depending on the location of the blower effect drying device 800. It may be provided in the vicinity of the lower speaker 19b on the left side.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment, the ball launching device 79 for launching the game ball to the gaming area 32 and the operation handle 24 for operating the ball launching device 79 are provided. In the gaming machine provided with, the first blowing passage 820 for guiding the wind from the blowing means to the blowing means (blower unit 810), the ball guide path 79a for guiding the game ball to the ball launching device 79, and the gaming machine 10. The air outlet 830a is provided with a second air passage 830 for guiding the wind from the air blowing means and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game. , The effect control means is provided in the vicinity of the operation handle 24 (see FIG. 58), and the effect control means is provided from the blower dry state, which preferentially guides the air from the blower means to the ball guide path 79a, from the blower means. The air is switched to the air blowing effect state in which the air is preferentially guided to the air blowing port 830a (see FIGS. 59 to 62).
Therefore, at least in the air-dried state, the moisture adhering to the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a can be forcibly removed by the wind, so that the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. .. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
Further, a blowing effect is performed in which the wind from the blowing means (blower unit 810) for generating the wind for removing the moisture adhering to the game ball is sent toward the hand operating the player's operation handle 24. Because it can also be done, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment includes a first opening / closing member 821 for opening / closing the first air passage 820 and a second opening / closing member 831 for opening / closing the second air passage 830. The effect control means (effect control device 300) opens either one of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 and closes one of the first opening / closing member 821 to close the other, thereby setting the air blowing dry state and the air blowing effect state. It can be configured to switch (see FIGS. 59, 60, 62).
With this configuration, one of the first opening / closing member 821 and the second opening / closing member 831 is opened, and one of them is closed. It is possible to switch.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the blowing means (blower unit 810) is converted into a first state facing the first blowing path 820 side and a second state facing the second blowing path 830 side. It is possible, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can be configured to switch between the blower dry state and the blower effect state by converting the blower means between the first state and the second state. (See FIG. 61).
With this configuration, it is possible to switch between the blower dry state and the blower effect state by a simple configuration that only converts the blower means (blower part 810) between the first state and the second state. Become.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment, the first air passage 820 can be configured to go toward the ball guide path 79a via the ball launcher 79 or its vicinity (FIG. 62). reference).
With this configuration, hot air (or warm air) can be blown to the game ball passing through the ball guide path 79a, so that the moisture adhering to the game ball supplied to the ball launcher 79 can be efficiently removed. It can be removed.

Further, according to the gaming machine 10 of the second modification of the second embodiment, the blowing means (blower unit 810) and the gaming ball are guided in the gaming machine provided with the speakers 19a and 19b capable of outputting the game effect sound. The first air passage 820 that guides the air from the air blowing means to the ball flow path (ball guide path 79a (in the case of FIG. 58) and the rear flow path (in the case of FIG. 63)) toward the outside of the gaming machine 10. The open air outlet 830a is provided with a second air passage 830 for guiding the wind from the air blowing means and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game. The air port 830a is a speaker (on the right side). Provided in the vicinity of the lower speaker 19b (in the case of FIG. 58) and the upper speaker 19a on the left side (in the case of FIG. 63), the effect control means is a blowing means when a specific effect (for example, a highly expected effect) is executed. It can be configured to switch from the air blowing dry state in which the air from the air is preferentially guided to the spherical flow path to the air blowing effect state in which the air from the air blowing means is preferentially guided to the air outlet 830a (see FIGS. 59 to 62). ).
Therefore, the water adhering to the game ball passing through the ball flow path (ball guide path 79a or the back flow path) can be forcibly removed by the wind, so that the rolling speed of the game ball is made uniform. be able to. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
Further, it is possible to perform a blowing effect of blowing the wind from the blowing means (blower unit 810) for generating the wind for removing the moisture adhering to the game ball toward the player, which makes the game more interesting. Can be enhanced.

[Third modification example]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a duct 450 as a drying means for removing water adhering to the gaming ball is arranged on the rear surface (back surface) side of the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 64 is a rear view of the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, and is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement location of the duct 450. FIG. 65A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the duct 450.
As shown in FIG. 64, a cooling fan 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300. The cooling FAN 45 of this modification is configured to suck in the heat inside the gaming machine 10 and blow it out to the outside of the gaming machine 10, with the suction port 45a of the cooling FAN 45 facing the front side (inside) and the outlet 45b rearward. It is arranged so as to face the side (outside).
For example, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a), on the back side of the gaming machine 10, hot air (or warm air) blown from the outlet 45b of the cooling FAN 45 is sent to the back flow path of the gaming machine 10. A duct 450 is provided to guide the vehicle. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this modification is configured to remove the moisture adhering to the gaming ball by utilizing the exhaust heat from various parts of the gaming machine 10.
In the example shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a), a duct 450 for guiding the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the chute 73 is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), a duct 450 for guiding the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the storage tank 72 may be provided, or a duct for guiding the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the bending flow path device 74. A 450 may be provided, or a duct 450 that guides the wind from the cooling FAN 45 to the inside of the upstream portion forming member 76 may be provided.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment, the gaming machine provided with the ball payout device 75 that pays out the game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is guided to the ball payout device 75. A discharge heat supply means (duct 450) for supplying exhaust heat to a payout standby flow path (a flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74) on which the gaming ball stands by is provided.
Therefore, since the water adhering to the game ball passing through the payout standby flow path can be forcibly removed by heat, the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third modification of the second embodiment, a cooling fan (cooling FAN45) for forcibly discharging the heat inside the gaming machine 10 to the outside is provided, and the exhaust heat supply means (duct 450) is provided. ) Can be configured to supply the heat discharged by the cooling fan to the discharge standby flow path (the flow path formed by the storage tank 72, the chute 73, and the bending flow path device 74).
With this configuration, hot air (or warm air) can be blown to the game ball passing through the discharge standby flow path, so that the moisture adhering to the game ball supplied to the ball payout device 75 is efficiently eliminated. Can be removed well.

[Fourth modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of this modification, a rocking member 48 as a drying means for removing water adhering to the gaming ball is arranged in the gaming area 32.

FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 30 of this modified example, and is a diagram showing an example of an arrangement location of the swing member 48. Further, FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of the rocking member 48, (a) is a front view of the rocking member 48, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rocking member 48.
For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the rocking member 48 faces the first portion 32a of the right gaming region of the gaming region 32, that is, the location where the gaming ball launched into the right gaming region of the gaming region 32 first collides. It is arranged in the place where it is used. Therefore, the game ball launched into the right game area of the game area 32 first collides with the first portion 32a and then collides with the rocking member 48.

The rocking member 48 can be arranged at the first place 32a, that is, the place where the game ball launched into the game area 32 first collides, but the wear of the rocking member 48 is suppressed. From the viewpoint of the above, it is preferable that the rocking member 48 is arranged at a place other than the first place 32a. Further, the rocking member 48 can be arranged at a place other than the place facing the first place 32a, but the swing frequency of the rocking member 48 is increased and the moisture removing effect of the rocking member 48 ( From the viewpoint of enhancing the dehumidifying effect), the rocking member 48 is preferably disposed at a position facing the first position 32a.
Further, the rocking member 48 can be arranged in the left game area of the game area 32. Also in this case, it is preferable to dispose the swing member 48 at a place other than the place where the game ball launched into the left game area of the game area 32 first collides, and at a place facing the place where the game ball first collides. It is more preferable to dispose of it.

As shown in FIGS. 67A and 67B, the rocking member 48 includes, for example, a rectangular parallelepiped case body 48a and a plurality of granular desiccants 48b housed in the case body 48a. To.
The case body 48a is provided with a plurality of through holes that communicate the inside and the outside of the case body 48a. The granular desiccant 48b is a granular hygroscopic agent such as silica gel, and the shape and size of the through holes of the case body 48a are set to a shape and size in which the granular desiccant 48b and the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through. ing. Although the rear surface portion of the case body 48a is not provided with the through hole in FIG. 67 (b), a plurality of through holes may be provided on the rear surface portion of the case body 48a. Further, the plurality of through holes provided in the case body 48a may be formed on at least one of the six surfaces of the case body 48a.

The case body 48a is attached to the game board 30 so as to be rotatable around the rotation shaft 48a1, for example. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the game ball collides with the swing member 48, the swing member 48 rotates (swings) about the rotation shaft 48a1.
Further, the case body 48a contains a granular desiccant 48b in an amount smaller than the maximum capacity of the case body 48a. Therefore, when the game ball collides with the rocking member 48 and the rocking member 48 rotates (swings), the granular desiccant 48b is agitated in the case body 48a and therefore collides with the rocking member 48. Moisture adhering to the game ball can be efficiently removed, and moisture in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the rocking member 48.

The rocking member 48 of this modification is made to be substantially parallel to the first portion 32a in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 66, for example, from the viewpoint of smoothing the flow of the game ball in the right game region. However, the rocking member 48 does not have to be substantially parallel to the first portion 32a under normal conditions.
Further, the swing member 48 does not have to be attached to the game board 30 so as to be freely rotatable (swing) about the rotation shaft 48a1. That is, the swing member 48 may be attached to the game board 30 so as to swing when the game ball collides, and may be attached to the game board 30 by an elastic member such as a spring, for example.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball can flow down, the gaming ball collides with a predetermined position in the gaming area 32. A swinging member 48 is arranged, and the swinging member 48 includes a case body 48a having moisture permeability and a plurality of granular desiccants 48b housed inside the case body 48a, and the swinging member 48. By shaking the 48, the plurality of granular desiccants 48b are stirred in the case body 48a.
Therefore, it is possible to remove the water adhering to the game ball that has collided with the rocking member 48, and the rocking member 48 can keep the inside of the game area 32 in a low humidity state, so that the game ball can be rolled. The moving speed can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured. Further, since the swing member 48 swings when the game ball collides with it, it is possible to produce a visual effect.
The case body 48a is not limited to the one provided with a plurality of through holes, and can be appropriately changed as long as it has moisture permeability. For example, the front surface and the side surface are open surfaces, and the openings thereof. The surface may be covered with a moisture-permeable sheet (moisture-permeable paper, etc.).
Further, the shape of the rocking member 48 is not limited to the rectangular parallelepiped shape and can be appropriately changed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fourth modification of the second embodiment, the predetermined location (that is, the location where the swing member 48 is arranged) is the location where the gaming ball launched into the gaming area 32 first collides. It can be configured to be other than (for example, the first place 32a).
With this configuration, when the game ball collides with the rocking member 48, as compared with the case where the rocking member 48 is arranged at the place where the game ball launched into the game area 32 first collides. Since the impact is weakened, it is possible to suppress wear of the rocking member 48 (progress of abrasion of the granular desiccant 48b, etc.).
The drying means provided in the game area 32 is not limited to the rocking member 48 and can be appropriately changed. For example, a member molded from silica gel or the like may be used. Examples of the member molded from silica gel include the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device (Public) 37, the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device (large winning opening) 38, the starting port, the cel image used for decoration, and the like. , Sheets, stickers, windmills, and some of the production items. Further, the drying means provided in the game area 32 may be arranged at a place where the game balls do not collide.

[Fifth variant]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description is omitted, and mainly different parts are described. explain.
In the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with an opening / closing member 990 as a drying means for removing water adhering to the gaming ball instead of the attacker type opening / closing door 38c. Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present modification, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a general winning opening 35, and the general winning opening forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35 is provided with water adhering to the game ball. A winning opening forming member 95 is arranged as a drying means for removing.

The gaming machine 10 of the present modification is provided with, for example, the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 68 in place of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 2 and the general winning opening 35 on the right side.
The configuration of the special variable winning device 38 of this modification will be described. As shown in FIGS. 68 to 70, the special variable winning device 38 has a flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board 30 and a flow path front wall arranged in front of the flow path rear wall 962. It is sandwiched between 952 and has a flow path 38f through which game balls can flow in a row. The flow path 38f is inclined so as to go down to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls flow down in a row toward the left.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the bottom surface of the substantially central portion of the flow path 38f is composed of an opening / closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction. The opening / closing member 990 is driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and projects forward as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 (a) to project a special variable winning opening device 38 (large winning opening 38d). ) Can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won, and an open state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 38d by retracting backward as shown in FIG. 70 (b). It has become. That is, when the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f does not flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the large winning opening 38d when the opening / closing member 990 is closed, and the opening / closing member 990 is in the open state. Is designed to flow into the big winning opening 38d. When the opening / closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening / closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 71, the special variation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 provided with a flow path front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 provided with a flow path rear wall 962, and a main body portion 970 to which an opening / closing member 990 and the like are attached. A cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body portion 970 is provided.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged close to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game ball does not flow down in front of the front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is a lens that is decorated and partly capable of transmitting light. An LED (not shown) is arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as a decorative means, and it is possible to decorate the special variable winning device 38 with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variable winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the batch display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent batch display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper portion of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 is a flow path front wall 952 forming a side wall on the front side of the flow path 38f.

As shown in FIG. 69, a plurality of front wall projecting portions 954 projecting rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow path front wall 952. The front wall protrusion 954 is a triangular columnar protrusion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is slightly upstream of the protrusion 992 in front of each of the plurality of protrusions 992 provided on the opening / closing member 990. It is provided so as to be located at. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing down to the left to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f, for example, as shown in FIG. 75. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Since the front wall protrusion 954 is located slightly upstream, the game ball flowing to the left is guided backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further backward by the protrusion 992. It is designed to be able to effectively guide the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 72, the back surface side of the front wall member 950 is provided with a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 953 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The function of the extending wall 953 is different depending on the place where the wall is provided. A guide flow path forming portion 953c that forms a guide flow path 955 that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth 38d, a switch mounting portion forming portion 953d that forms a mounting portion 956 that mounts a large winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 are formed. It has a function as a peripheral wall 953f for preventing the intrusion of the game ball flowing down around the general winning opening forming portion 953e and the special variable winning device 38.

The bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f is an inclined surface inclined to the right side when viewed from the back surface side. Further, the large winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so as to collect the game balls flowing into the large winning opening 38d into the induction flow path 955. Game balls can flow into the guide flow path 955 in a single row, and a large winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion into the guide flow path 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 38d will flow into the induction flow path 955 after being detected by the large winning opening switch 38a. The guidance flow path 955 formed by the guidance flow path forming portion 953c is a flow path for guiding the game ball from the large winning opening 38d to the back surface side of the game board 30, and the game ball is rearward on the back surface of the front surface portion 951. Ribs 957 are formed to guide to. Further, the general winning opening forming portion 953e forms the general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variable winning device 38. A rib 958 for guiding the game ball flowing into the general winning opening 35 to the rear is formed on the back surface of the front surface portion 951.

As shown in FIG. 73 (a), the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface portion 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 forming a side wall on the rear side of the flow path 38f. Further, at a position at the lower end of the flow path rear wall 962, an opening / closing member insertion portion 963 penetrating the front and rear for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed.

Further, on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall projecting portions 964 projecting forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 69, the rear wall projecting portion 964 is a triangular columnar projecting portion having slopes on the left and right side surfaces, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing to the left forward in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f. That is, it forms a contact portion where the game balls flowing down the flow path 38f can come into contact with each other. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the flow path 38f in the portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball can be reliably placed. It is possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 73, the guide flow path 955 communicates with the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961 in the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 where the guide flow path 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating back and forth is formed in. Further, above the guide flow path 955, a switch mounting portion 965 is formed which penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the large winning opening switch 38a. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 facing the portion of the front wall member 950 where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is moved to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a is formed so as to communicate the general winning port flow path 966 to be guided to the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 73B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the back surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. The function of the extending wall 967 is different depending on the place where the wall is provided. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c forming the periphery of the special variable winning device 38.

The guide flow path forming portion 967a forms a guide flow path 955 so as to guide the game ball guided toward the back surface side from the penetration portion 968 downward. Further, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the guide flow path 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening flow path forming portion 967b forms the general winning opening flow path 966 so as to guide the game ball guided toward the back surface side from the penetrating portion 966a downward. Further, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end portion of the general winning opening flow path 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed according to the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates back and forth formed in the portion of the game board 30 to which the special variable winning device 38 is attached, and when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board 30. The peripheral wall 967c is inserted into the penetrating portion. Further, the back surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board 30 when the special variable winning device 38 is attached to the game board 30. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 69, for example, an opening / closing member unit 980 having an opening / closing member 990 and an operating mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body portion 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 transmits the driving force from the opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction, the large winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening / closing member 990, and the large winning opening solenoid 38b that drives the opening / closing member 990. The drive arm 983 is provided.
Further, the opening / closing member unit 980 is in a state in which the opening / closing member 990 is projected forward as shown in FIG. 74 (a) and the special variation winning device 38 is closed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (b). The opening / closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the opening / closing member 990 is retracted backward and a state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened. The opening / closing member 990 can appear above the large winning opening 38d via the opening / closing member holding portion 976 formed in the main body portion 970 and the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960.

The opening / closing member 990 is slidably arranged back and forth on a holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the opening / closing member 990, the front end portion extending upward of the large winning opening 38d is set to be one step lower than the upper surface portion 994, and the flow path forming portion forming the bottom surface of the flow path 38f. It is said to be 991.
The flow path forming portion 991 is formed with a plurality of protruding portions 992 protruding upward in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening / closing member 990. The side surface on the upstream side of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball flowing down from the right can be smoothly guided backward toward the recess 993. Further, the side surface on the downstream side of the protrusion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that when a game ball flowing forward from the recess 993 comes into contact, the side surface can be guided toward the downstream side.

Further, a recess 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 that is one step lower and faces the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction. The distance between the side surface of the stepped portion forming the concave portion 993 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is set so that the game balls can flow down in a row at any position. Further, the downstream side surface of the side surface of the step portion forming the concave portion 993 is formed diagonally so that the front side faces the downstream side, so that the game ball can smoothly flow forward from the concave portion 993. There is.
That is, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as a protrusion 992 and a recess 993. Due to such undulations, the game ball stays on the opening / closing member 990 for a long time.

FIG. 75 shows the flow mode of the game ball in the special variable winning device 38. The game ball flowing down the flow path 38f from right to left is first guided diagonally forward by the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 of the opening / closing member 990. Then, it is guided diagonally backward by the front wall protrusion 954 and is guided diagonally backward by the protrusion 992 of the opening / closing member 990 and flows into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is guided diagonally forward again by the downstream side surface of the recess 993 formed diagonally toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

After that, the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 repeatedly guide diagonally backward, and the concave portion 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964 guide diagonally forward, and the game ball flowing down the flow path 38f meanders back and forth. It will flow down while. As a result, the time to stay on the opening / closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the flow path 38f has no undulations such as the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 and flows straight down. It will be. Therefore, the game ball is always present on the opening / closing member 990, and even when the opening time of the special variable winning device 38 is short, it exists on the opening / closing member 990 when the opening / closing member 990 is opened. There is a high possibility that the existing game ball will fall and win a prize in the large winning opening 38d, and even with a short opening, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning. It is preferable to secure the time required for the game ball to stay on the opening / closing member 990 for the interval time for closing the special variable winning device 38 before the round of short opening. ..

Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the game ball staying on the opening / closing member 990 bounces by coming into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 and is guided in a direction away from the large winning opening 38d. Will be done. Further, the bounced game ball may be further separated from the large winning opening 38d by coming into contact with the front wall protrusion 954 of the flow path front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the flow path rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the protrusions 992 formed on the opening / closing member 990 are arranged at intervals through which the game balls can pass, they may fall through these intervals without contacting the protrusions 992. The opening time of the special variable winning device 38 in the case of short opening, which will be described later, is a time during which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protrusion 992 or the like can flow into the large winning opening 38d as described above. ing. As a result, even if it is a short opening, it is possible to flow into the large winning opening 38d.

By providing the protrusion 992, the front wall protrusion 954, and the rear wall protrusion 964 in this way, the rolling mode of the game ball when the opening / closing member 990 is opened becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, when the opening / closing member 990 is opened, the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening / closing member 990 into the large winning opening 38d can be shifted, and ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

The flow path 38f is provided with a front wall protrusion 954, a rear wall protrusion 964, a protrusion 992, and a recess 993 as undulations, but other than these may be used. For example, a meandering groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 as an undulation, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. Further, as undulations, rib-shaped protrusions and grooves are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 990 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the flow direction, so that when the game ball flows down, it flows down while being moved in the vertical direction by the protrusions and grooves. You can do it.

As shown in FIG. 76A, for example, the opening / closing member 990 includes an opening / closing member main body 990a having a space inside, and a plurality of granular desiccants 990b housed in the opening / closing member main body 990a. ..
At the boundary (that is, the step portion) between the upper surface portion 994 of the opening / closing member main body 990a and the flow path forming portion 991, a slit hole 995 communicating the inside and the outside of the opening / closing member main body 990a is provided. In FIGS. 68 to 75, the slit hole 995 is not shown. The granular desiccant 990b is a granular hygroscopic agent such as silica gel, and the width of the slit hole 995 (that is, the length in the vertical direction) is set to a width at which the granular desiccant 990b and the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through. Has been done.

The opening / closing member main body 990a contains a granular desiccant 990b in an amount smaller than the maximum capacity of the opening / closing member main body 990a. Therefore, the granular desiccant 990b is agitated in the opening / closing member main body 990a due to the impact when the game ball collides with the opening / closing member 990 or the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 990, so that the granular desiccant 990b adheres to the game ball colliding with the opening / closing member 990. The moisture in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the opening / closing member 990.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), a winning opening forming member 95 is arranged in the general winning opening forming portion 953e forming the general winning opening 35.
As shown in FIGS. 76 (b) and 76 (c), for example, the winning opening forming member 95 includes a winning opening forming member main body 95a having an internal space and a plurality of granular dryings housed in the winning opening forming member main body 95a. It comprises the agent 95b.
The upper surface of the winning opening forming member main body 95a is provided with a plurality of through holes that communicate the inside and the outside of the winning opening forming member main body 95a. The granular desiccant 95b is a granular hygroscopic agent such as silica gel, and the shape and size of the through hole of the winning opening forming member body 95a is such that the granular desiccant 95b and the game ball cannot be fitted or passed through. Is set to.

The winning opening forming member main body 95a contains a granular desiccant 95b in an amount smaller than the maximum capacity of the winning opening forming member main body 95a. Therefore, the granular desiccant 95b is agitated in the winning opening forming member main body 95a by the impact when the game ball collides with the winning opening forming member 95, and therefore adheres to the playing ball colliding with the winning opening forming member 95. The moisture in the game area 32 can be efficiently removed by the winning opening forming member 95.
Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), the winning opening forming member 95 is arranged in the vicinity of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. Therefore, since the heat generated by the large winning opening solenoid 38b can promote the desorption of the water adsorbed on the granular desiccant 95b, the dehumidifying effect of the winning opening forming member 95 can be prolonged.

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball can flow down, a movable member (opening / closing member) that performs a predetermined operation in the gaming area 32. A movable accessory device (special variable winning device 38) having a 990) and a drive source (large winning opening solenoid 38b) for generating a driving force for operating the movable member is provided, and the movable accessory device is configured. The predetermined members (opening / closing member 990, winning opening forming member 95) arranged in the game area 32 are a case body having moisture permeability (opening / closing member main body 990a, winning opening forming member main body 95a) and a case. It consists of a plurality of granular desiccants 990b and 95b stored inside the body.
Therefore, since the inside of the game area 32 can be kept in a low humidity state by the predetermined member (opening / closing member 990, winning opening forming member 95), the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

The case body (opening / closing member main body 990a, winning opening forming member main body 95a) is not limited to the one provided with communication holes (slit holes 995, through holes) that communicate the inside and the outside of the case body, and is breathable. As long as it has, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper surface or the side surface may be an opening surface, and the opening surface may be covered with a moisture permeable sheet (moisture permeable paper or the like).
Further, the predetermined member (that is, the member containing the granular desiccant) is not limited to the opening / closing member 990 and the winning opening forming member 95, and can be appropriately changed.
Further, the movable accessory device is not limited to the device provided with a plurality of predetermined members (that is, members containing a granular desiccant), and may be provided with one predetermined member. For example, in the case of this modification, only one of the opening / closing member 990 and the winning opening forming member 95 may be a member containing a granular desiccant.
Further, the movable accessory device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the board effect device 44 may be used. Further, the drive source is not limited to the solenoid, and may be a motor or the like.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the second embodiment, the predetermined member (in the case of this modification, the winning opening forming member 95) is a member constituting the movable accessory device (special variable winning device 38). Of these, the member can be configured to be arranged in the vicinity of the drive source (large winning opening solenoid 38b).
With such a configuration, it is possible to promote the dehumidification of the moisture adsorbed on the granular desiccant 95b by the heat generated by the drive source (large winning opening solenoid 38b), so that the predetermined member (winning opening forming member 95) is used. It is possible to prolong the dehumidifying effect.
The predetermined member arranged in the vicinity of the drive source is not limited to the immovable member, and may be a movable member. Further, when the movable accessory device includes a plurality of movable members, among the plurality of movable members, the movable member disposed in the vicinity of the drive source at the initial position is incorporated with a predetermined member (that is, a granular desiccant). It is preferable to use a member).

As described above, according to the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the second embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the gaming area 32 in which the gaming ball can flow down, a movable member (opening / closing member) that performs a predetermined operation in the gaming area 32. A movable accessory device (special variable winning device 38) having 990) is provided, and the movable members include a case body having moisture permeability (opening / closing member main body 990a) and a plurality of granular desiccants 990b housed inside the case body. And consists of.
Therefore, since the movable member (opening / closing member 990) can keep the inside of the game area 32 in a low humidity state, the rolling speed of the game ball can be made uniform. Therefore, since a stable winning rate can be realized at all times, the fairness of the game can be ensured.
Further, a plurality of granular desiccants 990b are built in the movable member (opening / closing member 990), and the granular desiccant 990b is agitated in the case body (opening / closing member main body 990a) by operating the movable member. The movable member makes it possible to efficiently remove the moisture in the game area 32.

The case body (opening / closing member main body 990a) is not limited to the one provided with a communication hole (slit hole 995) that communicates the inside and the outside of the case body, and can be appropriately changed as long as it has moisture permeability. For example, the upper surface or the side surface may be an opening surface, and the opening surface may be covered with a moisture permeable sheet (moisture permeable paper or the like).
Further, the movable accessory device is not limited to the special variable winning device 38 and can be appropriately changed. For example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the board effect device 44 may be used. Further, the drive source is not limited to the solenoid, and may be a motor or the like.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the fifth modification of the second embodiment, the movable member (opening / closing member 990) can be configured so that the gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area 32 can collide with the movable member (opening / closing member 990).
With such a configuration, when the game ball collides with the movable member (opening / closing member 990), it is possible to remove the water adhering to the game ball. Further, since the granular desiccant 990b is agitated in the case body (opening / closing member main body 990a) by the impact when the game ball collides with the movable member, the moisture adhering to the game ball colliding with the movable member is efficiently removed. In addition to being able to remove it, the movable member can efficiently remove the moisture in the game area 32.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Gaming machine 19a Upper speaker (speaker)
19b Lower speaker (speaker)
21 Upper plate 23 Lower plate 24 Operation handle 32 Game area 38 Special variable prize device (movable accessory device)
38b Grand prize opening solenoid (drive source)
45 Cooling FAN (cooling fan)
48 Swing member 48a Case body 48b Granular desiccant 75 Ball dispenser 79 Ball launcher 79a Ball guide path 95 Winning port forming member 95a Winning port forming member body 95b Granular desiccant 300 Production control device (effect control means)
210 Precision plate unit 211 Upper hole (air outlet)
212 Pilot hole 450 duct (exhaust heat supply means)
610 Blower (blower means)
611 Outlet 612 Suction port 620A Dehumidifying part on the upper plate side (dehumidifying means, dehumidifying means on the upper plate side)
620B Dehumidifying part on the lower plate side (dehumidifying means, dehumidifying means on the lower plate side)
621 Dehumidifying sheet 710 Heating unit (heating means)
720 temperature adjustment unit (adjustment means)
730 Thermally conductive metal plate (heat transfer means)
740 Back flow path wall 810 Blower (blower means)
820 1st air passage 821 1st opening / closing member 830 2nd air passage 830a Blower port 831 2nd opening / closing member 990 Opening / closing member (movable member, predetermined member)
990a Opening and closing member body 990b Granular desiccant

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the fulfillment of predetermined conditions
Control means for controlling the game and
A setting means that enables setting a probability setting value to which a probability value used for the lottery of the game is assigned, and
A display means capable of selectively displaying a display related to the probability setting value and a display related to the performance of the gaming machine is provided.
The control means is
A storage means that can retain the stored information even after the power is turned off,
It is provided with a legitimacy determination means for determining the validity of the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on.
The storage means includes a game work area and a game stack area related to game control, and a non-game work area and a non-game stack area related to the performance of the game machine.
The game work area is targeted for the legitimacy determination, and the game stack area, the non-game work area, and the non-game stack area are not included in the legitimacy determination target.
If the result of the validity determination is not valid, the game shifts to a game stop state in which the probability setting value is set to a configurable state as a release condition.
During the timer interrupt, the processing related to the setting of the probability set value by the setting means is performed.
After the setting of the probability setting value is completed, the game work area and the game stack area are initialized except for the non-game work area and the non-game stack area in a state where timer interrupts are disabled.
A gaming machine characterized in that a timer interrupt is enabled after the initialization is completed.

Images